Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 402

DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date:

Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

TRN015720-1/0003
Fundamentals

Bentley Institute Course Guide


ProSteel V8i AutoCAD Engineering
Trademarks

AccuDraw, Bentley, the “B” Bentley logo, MDL, MicroStation and SmartLine are registered
trademarks; PopSet and Raster Manager are trademarks; Bentley SELECT is a service
mark of Bentley Systems, Incorporated or Bentley Software, Inc.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc.

All other brands and product names are the trademarks of their respective owners.

Patents
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

United States Patent Nos. 5,8.15,415 and 5,784,068 and 6,199,125.

Copyrights

©2000-2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated.


MicroStation ©1998 Bentley Systems, Incorporated.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

All rights reserved.


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

ProSteel V8i AutoCAD Engineering Fundamentals 2 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Table of Contents
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

ProSteel V8i Engineering Fundamentals Overview _________ 9


Course Description ____________________________________9
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

ProSteel V8i AutoCAD Modeling Fundamentals


ProSteel V8i ________________________________________ 11

Modeling Fundamentals Overview _____________________ 13


Course Description ____________________________________13
Target Audience_______________________________________13
Prerequisites _________________________________________13
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Course Objectives _____________________________________14


Modules Included _____________________________________14
System Requirements __________________________________15
Software Requirements_________________________________15
Documentation Conventions_____________________________16
Installation Folders ____________________________________17
Files ________________________________________________18
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Template (dwt) File and Model Setup ___________________ 19


Module Overview _____________________________________19
Module Prerequisites __________________________________19
Module Objectives_____________________________________19
Program Startup and Template File Creation ________________20
Units and Measurement Values __________________________22
ProSteel Options (Default Settings)________________________23
Global Settings ____________________________________23
Module Review _______________________________________34
Questions ________________________________________34
Answers __________________________________________34

Viewing and Moving Around the Model _________________ 35


Module Overview _____________________________________35
Module Prerequisites __________________________________35
Module Objectives_____________________________________35
Utilizing Structural View Tools____________________________36

Feb-12 3 Table of Contents


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Table of Contents

Understanding and Manipulating Clipping Planes ____________40


User-Defined Templates ________________________________43
Module Review _______________________________________45
Questions ________________________________________45
Answers __________________________________________45
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes ____________ 47


Module Overview _____________________________________47
Module Prerequisites __________________________________47
Module Objectives_____________________________________47
Handle Editing ________________________________________48
Drawing Steel Shapes in the Model________________________52
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Editing Steel Shapes and Plates___________________________62


The Common Tab __________________________________63
The Shapes Tab ____________________________________66
Using the Modify Functions on Steel Shapes and Plates _______68
Module Review _______________________________________70
Questions ________________________________________70
Answers __________________________________________70
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Creating a Workframe _______________________________ 71


Module Overview _____________________________________71
Module Prerequisites __________________________________71
Module Objectives_____________________________________71
Creating a Workframe and Review Settings _________________72
Creating and Manipulating Display Classes and Area Classes____85
Display Classes ____________________________________85
Area Classes_______________________________________87
Part Families ______________________________________88
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Module Review _______________________________________91


Questions ________________________________________91
Answers __________________________________________92

Inserting and Manipulating Shapes _____________________ 93


Module Overview _____________________________________93
Module Prerequisites __________________________________93
Module Objectives_____________________________________93
Inserting Steel Shapes Using the Line ______________________94
Assigning Steel Members to a Display Class _________________98
Inserting Steel Shapes Using the 2 Point Method_____________100
Module Review _______________________________________103

Creating Connections Between Elements ________________ 105


Module Overview _____________________________________105
Module Prerequisites __________________________________105

Feb-12 4 Table of Contents


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Table of Contents

Module Objectives_____________________________________105
Creating a Basic End Plate Connection _____________________106
Modifying Connections Using Grip Editing __________________124
Module Review _______________________________________131
Questions ________________________________________131
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Answers __________________________________________131

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing __________________ 133


Module Overview _____________________________________133
Module Prerequisites __________________________________133
Module Objectives_____________________________________133
Creating Base Plates on Columns _________________________134
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Drilling the Base Plate to Accommodate Anchor Bolts _________144


Creation of Dynamic and Static Bracings ___________________150
Module Review _______________________________________165
Questions ________________________________________165
Answers __________________________________________165

Purlin Courses, Web Angles, and Shear Plate Connections __ 167


Module Overview _____________________________________167
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Module Prerequisites __________________________________167


Module Objectives_____________________________________167
Creating the Purlins ____________________________________168
Adding Web Angle Connections __________________________186
Module Review _______________________________________192
Questions ________________________________________192
Answers __________________________________________192
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Structural Elements __________________________________ 193


Module Overview _____________________________________193
Module Prerequisites __________________________________193
Module Objectives_____________________________________194
Creating the Handrail___________________________________195
Creating the Stairs _____________________________________204
Ladder and Manual Views _______________________________211
Creating a Manual View ________________________________215
Module Review _______________________________________217
Questions ________________________________________217
Answers __________________________________________217

Extras _____________________________________________ 219


Module Overview _____________________________________219
Module Prerequisites __________________________________219
Module Objectives_____________________________________219
User-Created Shapes ___________________________________220

Feb-12 5 Table of Contents


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Table of Contents

Standard User Shape ___________________________________220


Roof and Wall Panels ___________________________________224
Combined Shapes _____________________________________225
Welded Shapes _______________________________________229
Export to Pure AutoCAD ________________________________235
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Centre of Gravity ______________________________________236


Collision Detection_____________________________________237
Unfold ______________________________________________238
Module Review _______________________________________240
Questions ________________________________________240
Answers __________________________________________240
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

ProSteel V8i AutoCAD Detailing


Fundamentals ______________________________________ 241

Detailing Fundamentals Overview ______________________ 243


Course Description ____________________________________243
Target Audience_______________________________________243
Prerequisites _________________________________________244
Course Objectives _____________________________________244
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Modules Included _____________________________________244

User Defined Styles and Symbols _______________________ 247


Module Overview _____________________________________247
Lesson 1: User Defined Styles ____________________________248
Bolt Style _________________________________________248
Detail Style ___________________________________________251
Elevation Flag Style _________________________________251
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Position Flag Style __________________________________252


Weld Flag Style ____________________________________252
Lesson 2: User Defined Symbols __________________________255
Benchmark symbol (north direction) ___________________255
Elevation Flags Symbol ______________________________257
Grid Text Blocks Symbol _____________________________258
Manual Cut Symbol _________________________________259
Position Flags Symbol _______________________________260
Weld Flags Symbol _________________________________260

ProSteel Grouping ___________________________________ 263


Module Overview _____________________________________263
Module Objectives_____________________________________263
Lesson 1: ProSteel Grouping _____________________________264
Grouping _________________________________________264
Assemblies________________________________________264
Groups ___________________________________________264

Feb-12 6 Table of Contents


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Table of Contents

Lesson 2: Parts in a Group _______________________________269


Lesson 3: Controlling Model Display via the Groups Function ___270
Lesson 4: Adding Component Parts to a Group ______________273
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Part Families and Part Descriptions _____________________ 275


Module Overview _____________________________________275
Modules Objectives ____________________________________275
Lesson 1: Creating and Manipulating Part Families ___________276
Part Families ______________________________________276
Lesson 2: User-defined Part Description____________________278

Positioning and Material Takeoffs ______________________ 281


Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Module Overview _____________________________________281


Module Objectives_____________________________________281
Lesson 1: Positioning the Model __________________________282
Lesson 2: Creating an External Parts List____________________297
Lesson 3: Creating a drawing Parts List _____________________304
Module Summary _____________________________________311
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Detail Center _______________________________________ 313


Module Overview _____________________________________313
Module Prerequisites __________________________________314
Module Objectives_____________________________________314
Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre ________315
What is the DetailCenter?____________________________316
Level 1: The Parts Tab Overview_______________________316
Level 2: The Views Tab Overview ______________________321
Level 3: The Insert Tab (Detail Block) Overview ___________324
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Lesson 2: Assigning a View to a Style and Creating a 2D


Deliverable Drawing ___________________________________335
Objectives ________________________________________335
Lesson3: Modifying the Model and Automatically Updating
the Detail Drawings ____________________________________345
Objectives ________________________________________345
Lesson 5: Managing Moved and Renamed Files ______________346
Objectives ________________________________________346
Manual Path Changing ______________________________346
Automatic Path Changing ____________________________347

Detail Styles ________________________________________ 351


Module Overview _____________________________________351
Saving Styles ______________________________________351
Partial Loading of Style Parameters ____________________352
Module Prerequisites __________________________________353
Module Objectives_____________________________________353

Feb-12 7 Table of Contents


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Table of Contents

Lesson 1: Creating a Detail Style __________________________353


Example 1: Anchor Plan_________________________________357
Example 2: Single Part DetailStyle_________________________365
Example 3: Beam Group Detail ___________________________371
Example 4: Making Elevation Detail _______________________378
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Appendix - ProSteel Toolbars and Tips & Tricks ___________ 387


Viewtools Toolbar _____________________________________387
Elements Toolbar______________________________________389
Edit Toolbar __________________________________________392
Utilities Toolbar _______________________________________396
Tips and Tricks ________________________________________400
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 8 Table of Contents


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
ProSteel V8i Engineering
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Fundamentals Overview
Course Description
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The ProSteel V8i AutoCAD Engineering Fundamentals course is composed of two


parts: Modeling Fundamentals and Detailing Fundamentals.

Modeling Fundamentals allows you to model your actual structure in a manner


similar to actual erection of the structure. This model is then used by the program
to automatically generate the required 2D shop drawings.

After you have created a model, completed your edits, and possibly issued a
Student: Mariano Tomasino

preliminary parts list, the creations of the 2D layouts (plan, elevations and
sections of the building) can begin. This will be covered in the Detailing
Fundamentals part of this course.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 9 ProSteel V8i Engineering Fundamentals Overview

Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Course Description

10 ProSteel V8i Engineering Fundamentals Overview


Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

ProSteel V8i
Fundamentals

Bentley Institute Course Guide


ProSteel V8i AutoCAD Modeling
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

12 ProSteel V8i AutoCAD Modeling Fundamentals


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
Modeling Fundamentals
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Overview
Course Description
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Bentley ProSteel V8i (PSV8i) is a structural steel construction application for


AutoCAD. If you have previously used traditional AutoCAD tools or other 2D
applications to create steel construction drawings, you will need to adjust to a
new method of creating drawings. ProSteel 3D allows you to model your actual
structure in a manner similar to actual erection of the structure. This model is
then used by the program to automatically generate the required 2D shop
drawings.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Target Audience
This course is recommended for the following audience(s):
• New and existing users of ProSteel
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Prerequisites
• A minimum of six months experience with AutoCAD 2D.
• Some familiarity with 3D commands and concepts.

Feb-12 13 Modeling Fundamentals Overview

Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated


Course Objectives

Course Objectives
After completing this course, you will be able to:
• Set up and move around a model.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

• Create and work with workframes.


• Insert and modify steel shapes and assign them to display classes.
• Create Cross bracing utilizing both static and fully dynamic methods.
• Insert base plates and use the drilling function.
• Create and modify joint connections.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

• Group interconnected parts into construction groups.


• Create purlins and modify them using copes, web angles, and the shear tab.
• Generate structural elements.
• Position a model and generate reports.
• Perform extra functionality such as exporting a file to pure AutoCAD,
Student: Mariano Tomasino

determining the center of gravity, collision detection, and the unfold function.

Modules Included
The following modules are included in this course:
• Template (dwt) File and Model Setup
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

• Viewing and Moving Around the Model


• Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes
• Creating a Workframe
• Inserting and Manipulating Shapes
• Creating Connections Between Elements
• Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing
• Construction Groups
• Purlin Courses, Web Angles, and Shear Plate Connections
• Structural Elements
• Positioning and Material Takeoffs
• Extras

Modeling Fundamentals Overview 14 Feb-12


Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
System Requirements

System Requirements
You must have a CD drive or Internet access for product installation. The following
prerequisites are required to run Bentley ProSteel V8i:
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Processor: Intel Pentium-based PC


Operating System: Microsoft Windows 2000, Service Pack 4 or
later, Microsoft Windows XP Professional,
SP1a or later
Internet: Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or greater
Memory: 1 GB or greater
Hard Disk 2GB minimum free hard disk space
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Input Device: Industry-standard input device supported by


Windows
Output Device: Industry-standard output device supported by
Windows
Video Graphics Card: Min. 512MB video card
Databases Supported: Supports Oracle 8.1.6, 8.1.7 and 9i, SQL Server
7, 2000 and 2005, MS Access 2000, XP or 2003
and MSDE 2000 databases
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Software Requirements
All systems must have the AutoCAD software fully installed. AutoCAD does not
need to be authorized beyond evaluation mode. The AutoCAD application should
be launched at least once before ProSteel V8i is installed.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

All required modules from the ProSteel V8i product suite should be installed and
executed in order to set the operation of the software into evaluation mode. This
will authorize the software for a ten-day period. It is preferred that the evaluation
mode is NOT set more than one or two days before the training session is
scheduled to begin. If systems are unable to be set to evaluation mode, you must
contact the consultant prior to arrival so the required temporary licenses can be
obtained and brought to your facility.

In many instances, a working ProSteel project that includes the drawing files used
in this training session will also be provided.

Feb-12 15 Modeling Fundamentals Overview


Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Documentation Conventions

Documentation Conventions
A number of conventions are maintained throughout ProSteel documentation to
improve the identification and understanding of the information presented.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

CONVENTION DESCRIPTION
Note: Precedes information of general importance.
Hint: Precedes optional time saving information.
Warning: Precedes information about actions that should not be performed under
normal operating conditions.
Input Commands or information that must be manually entered, clicked, or
selected are bolded.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Cascading Menu commands are bolded.


menus Example: Select Tools > Setup > Drawing Preferences.
Dialogs Dialog and database table names are in italics.
Field_Names Example: The Preferences dialog.
Select Indicates that the command must be executed from a menu or dialog.
Select or click Indicates an item (component or point) that may be selected on a drawing.

Throughout this manual, the menu command sequence required to execute


a command will be explicitly defined in the text, while the associated toolbar
Student: Mariano Tomasino

icon is presented in the margin.

Note: The dialogs, toolbars, etc, illustrated throughout this tutorial were
captured running AutoCAD 2008 in the Windows XP environment.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Modeling Fundamentals Overview 16 Feb-12


Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Installation Folders

Installation Folders
Listed below are the folders and subfolders created during the installation
process.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

CisSupport Cis files


Data* Databases: bolts, plates, shapes, user shapes, (combi shapes, roofwall,
weldshapes)
Detail intermediate folder used by ProSteel (one folder per 3D model detailed)
Dwg suggested folder to place drawing files (not recommended)
EULA End User License Agreement
Liesmich Read me files
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Export default export folder


FactorySettings for internal use (subfolders: Metric & Imperial)
Localised* One Subfolder Per Language Used:

English: language used


Bracings: bracing databases
Data: customizable Files
FactorySettings: (subfolders: Metric and Imperial) for internal use
Format: detailcenterxpress and mark numbering related files
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Help: help files


Partlist: database-driven B.O.M. templates
Resource: for internal use
Styles: metric and Imperial styles
Userblocks: user-defined blocks
NC CNC Data Default Output Folder
Prg main ProSteel folder & subfolders:

Bitmaps
Configuration Files
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Projects* project default folder


Read me Read me files
Temp metric & Imperial temp files
Varia* metric & Imperial command templates

*For an optimum usage of ProSteel V8i, these folders should be located in one
single hard drive and shared via the network to all ProSteel V8i users'
machines when using multiple stations running ProSteel V8i.

Note: The Temp folder should never be located on a network drive.

Feb-12 17 Modeling Fundamentals Overview


Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Files

Files
Files listed in this section can be edited with any text editor except for the
database (.mdb) files.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Default Location File


of Folder
..\prg\config\ Configuration: PRO_ST3D.CFGThe file is divided into two sections:

- Comments: identified by the “;” at the beginning of each line.


- Files & folders location: used if sharing files or folders over the network.
..\localised\lang Material: ProStructureMaterial.mdb. These materials will be sorted in the
uage\data\ selection list during modelling according to the order that they appear in this
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

file, regardless of their index No. This means that you can move materials up
the list if you want them to be at the beginning of the selection flyouts
during modelling. Each line has the following information: Index, Material,
Comments, Weight (Kg/m3), Usage Flag.

Description - Layer Description: PRO_ST3D.FDF

Hole Diameter: PRO_ST3D.HDT. After the comment lines, the file is divided
into columns. Each line corresponds to an available hole diameter. The file
structure is: Index, hole size in mm | gap in mm # hole size in inches | gap in
inches. Inch values are entered in decimal format.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Plate Description: PRO_ST3D.PDC. These are the available names for plates.
The file structure is: Index, Description

Plate Thickness: PRO_ST3D.PTT. These are the available plate thicknesses to


be used. The file structure is: Index, plate thickness in mm # plate thickness
in inches. Inch values are entered in decimal format.
..\data\shapes\ Steel Shape Databases: .MDB. You will also find in the corresponding
subfolder here bolts and plates databases as well as usershape subfolders.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Modeling Fundamentals Overview 18 Feb-12


Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Template (dwt) File and Model
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Setup
Module Overview
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

ProSteel V8i has all the capabilities of AutoCAD, plus features that accelerate and
ease working on models of steel structures.

In this module, you will learn how to set ProSteel V8i options and/or default
settings.

You will also learn how to create an AutoCAD dwt template file used when
starting a new Bentley ProSteel V8i model.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Module Prerequisites
• Basic Windows knowledge including file navigation etc.
• Previous experience with 3D CAD system, preferably AutoCAD
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Module Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Start the ProSteel V8i software
• Create a template file
• Access the ProSteel Options dialog and control the settings

Feb-12 19 Template (dwt) File and Model Setup

Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated


Program Startup and Template File Creation

Program Startup and Template File Creation


 Exercise 1: Starting ProSteel 3D
In this exercise, you will learn how to start the ProSteel V8i software. The main
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

application menu and toolbar are also introduced.


1 Select Programs > ProStructure V8i > ProStructure V8i for AutoCAD 200x
from your Windows Start menu or double-click the ProStructure V8i icon
on your desktop.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

2 Close the active dwg file without saving it.


3 Select File > New.
4 Select the V8i - Imperial [US-CDN].dwt template. .
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Note: This file is already tagged as an imperial file. If we had opened a non-
tagged file, we would have gotten a warning dialog asking us to tag this
file.

Template (dwt) File and Model Setup 20 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Program Startup and Template File Creation

The ProStructures 3D menu is now available:


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The ProSteel Design applications and supplemental utilities menus and


toolbars are also available.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 21 Template (dwt) File and Model Setup


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Units and Measurement Values

Units and Measurement Values


ProSteel 3D uses AutoCAD units, so you must set your units as you normally do
with AutoCAD. You will have to set the units for the 3D model and the 2D drawing
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

files. This can be achieved automatically by preparing dwt template files for
modelling and for 2D drawings.

ProSteel 3D also needs another variable to be set properly in order to be able to


insert the steel shapes in the proper dimensions. Let us explain here how it all
works.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Shape Databases are populated with all the information needed to build each
steel shape. The information in the shape's databases is either in metric or
imperial values. ProSteel 3D knows which system was used in each database
according to the shape configuration.

Once inside a dwt file, ProSteel 3D needs to know what system is going to be used
there.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Thanks to this, ProSteel 3D can now tell if it needs to convert the size of a shape
read on a metric database to be inserted into a metric (no conversion needed) or
an imperial (25.4 scale-down factor) model.

We strongly recommend you set up these two settings (Units & Measurement)
inside a dwt file for each possible combination you might need, so you do not
need to worry about it ever again.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

To set this, type "measurement" at the command prompt and select 0 (zero) for
Imperial or 1 (one) for Metric.

Note: Once the model is started in either measurement system, it cannot be


converted to the other measurement system.

Template (dwt) File and Model Setup 22 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
ProSteel Options (Default Settings)

ProSteel Options (Default Settings)

Global Settings
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Now we will look at the ProSteel V8i settings within ProSteel V8i. Because
ProSteel V8i needs to differentiate metric from imperial drawings, these settings
exist in double.

When ProSteel V8i installs it should give you access to the templates included in
the installation.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

You can modify these settings and save them as templates for each different
situation (per project, per client, per job, etc).

 Exercise 1: Access the Settings


1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select ProSteel 3D Options or right-
click on the drawing area and select ProSteel > Options.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

The ProSteel Options dialog opens. This multi-paged dialog contains the
default settings data, or global settings information, for the model.
2 Assign the Options parameters shown below.

Feb-12 23 Template (dwt) File and Model Setup


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
ProSteel Options (Default Settings)

3 Select Grips.
4 Assign the parameters shown below.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

5 Select Shapes.
6 Assign the parameters shown below.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

7 Select Shape Label.


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

8 Assign the parameters shown below.

Template (dwt) File and Model Setup 24 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
ProSteel Options (Default Settings)

9 Select Sketch Display.


10 Assign the parameters shown below.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

11 Select Naming Conventions.


12 Assign the parameters as shown below.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

13 Select the Flat steel selection list.


14 Assign the parameters as shown below.

Feb-12 25 Template (dwt) File and Model Setup


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
ProSteel Options (Default Settings)

15 Select Straight Plates.


16 Assign the parameters as shown below.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

17 Select Plate Label.


18 Assign the parameters as shown below.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

19 Select Plate Description.


20 Assign the parameters as shown below.

Template (dwt) File and Model Setup 26 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
ProSteel Options (Default Settings)

21 Select Calculation method.


22 Assign the parameters as shown below.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

23 Select Bolts.
24 Assign the parameters as shown below.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

25 Select Workframe.
26 Assign the parameters as shown below.

Feb-12 27 Template (dwt) File and Model Setup


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
ProSteel Options (Default Settings)

27 Select Assembly.
28 Assign the parameters as shown below.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

29 Select Values.
30 Assign the parameters as shown below.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

31 Select Loglinks.
32 Assign the parameters as shown below.

Note: The Allow additional data check box enables Connection Detailing.

Template (dwt) File and Model Setup 28 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
ProSteel Options (Default Settings)

33 Select Revision check.


34 Assign the parameters as shown below.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

35 Select Display.
36 Assign the parameters as shown below.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

37 Select Colours.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

38 Assign the parameters as shown below.

Feb-12 29 Template (dwt) File and Model Setup


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
ProSteel Options (Default Settings)

39 Select Monitor Colours.


40 Assign the parameters as shown below.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

41 Select Configuration / Isometric View.


42 Assign the parameters as shown below.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

43 Select Layer.
44 Assign the parameters as shown below.

Template (dwt) File and Model Setup 30 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
ProSteel Options (Default Settings)

45 Select Flat steel selection.


46 Assign the parameters as shown below.

Note: Set to STANDARD FLAT STEEL as per your requirement.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

47 Select Dialog settings.


48 Assign the parameters as shown below.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

49 Select Tooltips.
50 Assign the parameters as shown below.

Feb-12 31 Template (dwt) File and Model Setup


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
ProSteel Options (Default Settings)

51 Select Classes / Families.


52 Assign the parameters as shown below.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

53 Select Match Properties.


54 Assign the parameters as shown below.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

55 Click the check mark.


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

All of the settings are applied to the ProSteel model.


56 Select File > Save.
57 Select Dialog Settings in the Expert Mode list.

Template (dwt) File and Model Setup 32 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
ProSteel Options (Default Settings)

Additional fields are added to the Options page.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

A new page, Files, will be available at the very end of the list.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Hint: After doing some configurations using the expert mode, always set it
back to beginner mode.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 33 Template (dwt) File and Model Setup


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Module Review

Module Review

Questions
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

1 How do you tell ProSteel 3D if it needs to convert the size of a shape read
on a metric database to be inserted into a metric (no conversion needed)
or an imperial (25.4 scale-down factor) model?
2 What does the ProSteel Options dialog do?
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Answers
1 Set up these two settings (Units & Measurement) inside a dwt file for each
possible combination you might need, so you do not need to worry about
it ever again. Type "measurement" at the command prompt and select 0
(zero) for Imperial or 1 (one) for Metric.
2 This ProSteel Options dialog contains the default settings data, or global
Student: Mariano Tomasino

settings information, for the model.


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Template (dwt) File and Model Setup 34 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Viewing and Moving Around
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

the Model
Module Overview
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

In this module, you will learn about ProSteel's view manipulation functions and
the ProSteel tools provided to adjust the AutoCAD's UCS.

Module Prerequisites
• Basic Windows knowledge including file navigation, etc.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

• Previous experience with a 3D CAD system, preferably AutoCAD


• Completion of previous modules in this course recommended

Module Objectives
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

After completing this module, you will be able to:


• Change the view of a model
• Center a shape in the view
• Set the UCS by a shape either at a point or centered on the shape
• Understand what clipping planes are and how they affect the view of the
model
• Turn clipping planes on and off
• Change the clipping plane distances so as to change the resultant view

Feb-12 35 Viewing and Moving Around the Model

Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated


Utilizing Structural View Tools

Utilizing Structural View Tools


Different types of views are available in ProSteel V8i. Some are created
automatically, while others are user-defined/created. These views can also be
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

used to create engineering 2D plans, elevations and building cross-sections, as


well as fabricators' erection drawings.

These viewing tools all serve the same purpose, making it much easier to work in
a 3D environment than with plain AutoCAD tools.

ProSteel provides five isometric view points generated as per settings in the
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

ProSteel V8i Global Settings discussed in the previous module. These views can be
used to navigate in the model, as well as to generate isometric views of the whole
structure or of individual parts, assemblies or connection details.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

When you select any of the five provided views, you will notice that the viewing
direction of the model changes according to those settings.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

 Exercise 1: Change the Model View using the Overview Command


1 Select File > Open.
The VIEWMOD.dwg training drawing opens.
2 Browse to the training file directory.
3 Select the VIEWMOD.DWG drawing file.

Viewing and Moving Around the Model 36 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Utilizing Structural View Tools

4 Click Open.
5 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Isometric
Overview.
The model displays in an isometric view.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

6 Try the other view tools in this menu.


Additional view commands are provided in the ProSteel Zoom / View
toolbar.
7 Return the drawing to the Isometric Overview view.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

 Exercise 2: Change the Model View Using the Choose View Command

The Choose View function contains predefined views, which are automatically
created when a workframe is created. This simplifies the process of viewing a
model from any of the standard directional views (e.g., Front, Right, Left etc.).
1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Choose View.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

2 Select the Bentley_TOP view.


3 Select Set View.
The view is changed to match the selected view name.
4 Execute the Overview command.
5 Switch back to the Overview 1 view.
6 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Choose View.
7 Select the TOP view.
8 Select Set UCS.

Note: The UCS is changed to the view, but the view of the model does not
change.

Feb-12 37 Viewing and Moving Around the Model


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Utilizing Structural View Tools

 Exercise 3: Switch to an Object View (Object View Tools)

In this exercise, you will learn how to switch the view in the model so a selected
shape will be set as the current view and will have the AutoCAD UCS set to this
shape.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Object View


Centered.
The cross section of the beam (W14X43) displays.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

2 Select the beam located at the angle whose part name is displayed
(W14X43).
3 When prompted with the multi-colored direction indicator, select the axis
highlighted in yellow and then click to accept the selection.
The UCS is now centered in the shape and the model view is changed to
the cross section of the beam.
4 Experiment with this option by selecting a different axis when prompted
with the direction indicator.
5 Notice the change in the model view.

Viewing and Moving Around the Model 38 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Utilizing Structural View Tools

 Exercise 4: Switch the UCS to an Object (Object UCS Tools)

In this exercise, you will learn how to move the AutoCAD UCS to an object at a
specific point without changing the model view.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Isometric


Overview.
The standard Isometric View displays.
2 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Object UCS
centered.
The UCS is centered on the W14X43 member.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

3 Select the same W14X43 member as above.


4 Select the same left-hand axis (yellow).
The UCS moves to the object, but the view does not change.
5 Try this again, selecting a different axis.
6 Note the change of the UCS location and plane.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 39 Viewing and Moving Around the Model


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Understanding and Manipulating Clipping Planes

Understanding and Manipulating Clipping Planes


Working with a 3D model can quickly become complex, especially if many parts
are spatially stacked or overlap one another. By using AutoCAD Clipping Planes,
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

ProSteel offers a command to hide parts in front of and behind the current work
plane, also known as the cutting plane.

This simplifies the construction process significantly, since only those objects
approximately in the same work plane are visible. This prevents the accidental
manipulation of stacked shapes. The term "approximately" is used here in the
sense that only the objects within the Clipping Planes created are visible to the
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

front and rear.

If one of the defined views or an object view is selected, the hide option is
activated as the default setting unless the command has been deactivated
globally.

This command can be selectively activated or deactivated to permit viewing the


depths of all parts simultaneously for a general overview of the component parts
Student: Mariano Tomasino

of the model.

 Exercise 1: What Are Clipping Planes

In this section, you will learn what a Clipping Plane is and how it affects what you
see in the model.
1 Continuing with the VIEWMOD drawing, select Isometric Overview.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

The standard isometric view displays.


2 Notice the two front-to-rear connecting members. The element on the
right side of the frame is lower in elevation than the element on the left
side of the frame.
3 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Choose View.
4 Select Bentley_SIDE_L view.
5 Click Set View.
When the model regenerates it appears in the left-hand view, but you are
unable to see the member on the right side of the frame. This is because
the clipping plane distance for the left-frame view is set to 18" (18 inches)
or 1'-6" and the member located on the right side of the frame is outside
of this range.
6 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Choose View.

Viewing and Moving Around the Model 40 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Understanding and Manipulating Clipping Planes

7 Select Bentley_SIDE_R view.


8 Select Set View.

Note: The member on the left side of the frame is not visible because it is
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

outside of the clipping distance set for the right-hand view.

 Exercise 2: Set Clipping Planes On and Off

In this exercise, you will learn how to set the state of the clipping planes using the
Flip command.
1 Select Choose View.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

2 The left-side view Bentley_SIDE_L displays.


3 Select Bentley_SIDE_L view.
4 Select Set View.

Note: The members located on the right side of the model are not visible.
5 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Clipplane > Flip.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

The clipping planes are deactivated and the members on the right side of
the model are now visible.
6 Repeat the Flip command several times.
7 Note the change in the view of the model each time.

 Exercise 3: Changing Clipping Plane Distances


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

In this exercise, you will learn how to change the clip plane distance so that the
view in the model will change to show members that were originally outside of
the clipping planes, even though the clip planes are still ON.
1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Choose View.
The left-side view Bentley_SIDE_L displays.
2 Select Bentley_SIDE_L view.
3 Select Set View.
4 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Clipplane >
Distance.
The clipping planes are changed so that the view displays the members
located on the right side of the model.
The Current clipping plane distances dialog displays.

Feb-12 41 Viewing and Moving Around the Model


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Understanding and Manipulating Clipping Planes

5 Keep the Front distance at 1'-6".


6 Enter 8'-0" for the Back distance.
7 Click the check mark.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

The dialog closes, and the view now shows the column in the middle of
the model.

Note: You will learn later how to set the clip planes at the time the workframe
is generated.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Viewing and Moving Around the Model 42 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
User-Defined Templates

User-Defined Templates
Templates allow users to save and re-use all values related to a dialog (including
all tabs). This functionality saves time and allows settings to be standardized
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

within projects and shared between co-workers.

Each type of function has a dedicated file to which user-defined templates are
saved. Template files are grouped into the Varia folder under two separate
subfolders, Metric and Imperial.

Templates can be created through most ProSteel V8i dialogs.


Company: Seibo Ingeniería

To create or to load/import a template:


1 Select Template.
The ProSteel V8i Template Manager dialog appears.

To create a new template in a new folder:


1 Select New Folder.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

2 Type a new name for the folder (e.g. "FirstFolder").


3 Click once outside the name field.
4 Select Save Template As.
A new template is added with the name "Template".
5 Type a new name for the template (e.g. "FirstTemplate").
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

The fields/settings in the dialog are saved to the corresponding template


listed above.

To load a template:
1 Select Template.
The ProSteel V8i Template Manager dialog appears.
2 Select a template from the list of templates.
3 Select Load Template.

Feb-12 43 Viewing and Moving Around the Model


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
User-Defined Templates

All fields/settings in the dialog are populated from the template.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

To import a template:
1 Select Template.
The ProSteel V8i Template Manager dialog appears.
2 Select Import.
The file browser appears.
3 Select an existing template.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

4 Click Open.
The existing template is loaded into the ProSteel V8i Template Manager
dialog.

Viewing and Moving Around the Model 44 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Module Review

Module Review
Now that you have completed this module, let’s measure what you have learned.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Questions
1 How do you activate or deactivate clipping planes?
2 What does the Choose View function do, and how do you access it?
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Answers
1 Use the Flip command to activate or deactivate clipping planes. From the
ProStructures 3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Clipplane > Flip.
2 The Choose View function contains predefined views, which are
automatically created when a workframe is created. This simplifies the
process of viewing a model from any of the standard directional views
Student: Mariano Tomasino

(e.g., Front, Right, Left etc.). To use this function from the ProStructures
3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Choose View.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 45 Viewing and Moving Around the Model


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Module Review

46 Viewing and Moving Around the Model


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
Drawing and Editing Shapes
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

and Workframes
Module Overview
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

In this chapter, you will learn about ProSteel's Grip edit function, which is used to
edit and manipulate steel shapes, plates, and other elements.

Module Prerequisites
• Basic Windows knowledge including file navigation, etc.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

• Previous experience with a 3D CAD system, preferably AutoCAD


• Completion of previous modules in this course recommended

Module Objectives
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

After completing this module, you will be able to:


• Activate the grips and invoke the ProSteel Properties function
• Change various shape properties such as size, type and lengt.
• Modify structural objects such as workframes
• Draw steel shapes in the model
• Edit steel shapes and plates

Feb-12 47 Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes

Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated


Handle Editing

Handle Editing
In this lesson, you will use AutoCAD Grips to edit steel shapes in order to change
size, length, shape, type, and display options. You will also use grips to edit
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

ProSteel Objects.

 Exercise 1: Activate a Shape’s Grips and Modify Its Properties

In this exercise, you will learn how to activate a component's grips and display the
Shape Properties dialog. This dialog enables you to modify the properties that
define a shape.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

First, you’ll open the ViewMod.dwg training model.


1 Select File > Open.
2 Browse to the training file directory.
3 Select the ViewMod.dwg file.
4 Click Open.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

The ViewMod.dwg training model opens.


Now you’ll open the Shape Properties dialog.
5 Zoom in on the wide flange beam labeled W14X43.
6 Select the element.
The element’s AutoCAD grips are invoked and should appear as blue
squares.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

7 Right-click.

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes 48 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Handle Editing

8 Select PS3D Properties from the context menu.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

The Shape Properties dialog displays, as shown below.


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 49 Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Handle Editing

A brief description of the Shape Properties dialog pages is provided below.

General Data Layout: display options for the shape.

Shape Type: type, class, and size of shape.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Position: information relating to the shape's insertion point and orientation.

Dimension points: extra options for advanced dimensioning.


Partlist Data Data: information available for bill of materials, pos flags, etc.

Values: dimensional and weight information.

Assignments: data for detailing the part and displaying the part in relation to
the model and other shapes in the model.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Conical: data pertaining to slope a shape placed in the drawing.


Other pages that Cuts: information about cuts on the shape.
will eventually
appear Loglinks: settings for links between elements.
depending on
the element's
modifications

You will now change the shape size.


Student: Mariano Tomasino

9 Select Shape Type on the Shape Properties dialog.


10 Select C6X10.5 from the Shape Size list.
11 Notice the change of the shape in the model.

Note: ProSteel uses "non-modal" dialogs. This is a major benefit when editing
a shape or other object, as the changes made in the dialog are
immediately reflected in the actual model.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

12 Select the Layout tab.


13 Locate the Layout group box in the upper left-hand corner of the dialog.
14 Move the dialog off to the side so you can see the shape being edited.
15 Cycle through the various display methods and note the changes in the
shape and how it changes in the model.
16 Select Edges Inside in the Layout field.
The display is returned to the Edges Inside mode.
17 In the Options group box on the right-hand side of the Layout tab,
experiment with the display options of the shape and note the changes in
the model.
18 Clear the Part Label check box.

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes 50 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Handle Editing

19 Notice how the part name associated with the shape is no longer
displayed in the model.
20 Select Values.
21 Change the value in the Length field.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

22 Notice the change in length of the shape.


23 Return the values to their original settings.
24 Close the dialog.

Note: Modification with more precision and in relation to other ProSteel


objects will be covered in more depth in the next module.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 51 Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Drawing Steel Shapes in the Model

Drawing Steel Shapes in the Model


There are several methods of inserting shapes into a model, including insertion
via a line in the model, selecting two points in the model, and the selection of
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

multiple lines. You can also insert a shape in a cross-section, where the shape is
drawn in the negative Z-Axis from the current X-Y plane. The Line method and the
2 Point method are the most commonly used. For our training purposes we focus
on these methods.

This section provides an overview of the ProSteel V8i Shapes dialog. You will also
learn how to create a steel Shapes Template to minimize the shape selection.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

 Exercise 1: Create a Template File to Minimize the Shape Tables

In this exercise, you will learn how to create a template file of the North American
steel shapes.
1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Isometric
Overview.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

You will begin by inserting the columns on the Bentley workframe.


2 Select Shapes.
The ProSteel Shapes dialog displays.
Before you place a shape, you need to minimize the number of shape types
displayed within the dialog. To do this you will create a template file and save
it so that you can recall it later.
3 Select Display.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes 52 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Drawing Steel Shapes in the Model

The Shape Catalog shown below is divided into three main sections.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The list of shape tables shipped with the product is shown on the far left.
The list of available shapes for each table is displayed in the center.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

The Current Shape Classes section on the right contains only the shapes
you want to see when you invoke the Shapes Insert command.
Now we will alter the Current Shape Classes to show only the AISC US
IMPERIAL steel shapes and display them in Imperial Units.
4 Select <<.
All the shapes are removed from the Current Shape Classes section.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

5 Clear all of the options in the shape tables section except for AISC US
IMPERIAL.
The List of Available Shapes on the right reflects the change.
6 Select >>.
All of the shapes in the List of Available Shapes section are added to the
Current Shape Classes list.

Feb-12 53 Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Drawing Steel Shapes in the Model

7 Select the Imperial radio button.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

You will now save the new settings.


8 Select Template.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

The ProSteel Template Manager dialog appears.


9 Create a new folder named Bentley.
10 Add the template to the folder, naming it Training.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

11 Press Enter.
The ProSteel Template Manager dialog closes, and the previous dialog
returns.
12 Click the check mark.
The Steel shape insertion dialog is returned.

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes 54 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Drawing Steel Shapes in the Model

The options provided in the Straight Shapes dialog are described in the following
table.

Shape Type Shows the types of shape tables available for use in the model: Standard,
User, Combination, and Roof and Wall.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Resolution The available shape display resolutions


Shape Class Shape classes available for the currently selected Shape Type.
Shape Size The shape sizes available for the currently selected Shape Class. Once a
specific size member is selected, an image of that shape will appear
indicating the possible insertion points with the selected insertion point
highlighted in RED. Also indicated by the image is the current rotation of the
shape about its axis of insertion.
Options Key: the current shape that will be inserted if any one of the insertion
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

methods at the bottom of the dialog are selected. This can be different than
the shape shown in the Shape Type and Shape Size sections of the dialog.

Material: material assigned to this member at the time of insertion.

Layer: available layers for the elements.

Part Family: If family classes have been defined, you can set them here. The
selection of the family class can influence the colour of the part.

Detail Style: If detailing styles have been defined, set them here.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Display Class: If display classes have been defined, set them here.

Area Class: If area classes have been defined, set them here.

Description: If general parts descriptions have been defined, you can set
them here. The selection of the description can influence the colour and the
layer.
Delta X The insertion offset in X-direction. This field can only be entered if you have
selected the position 'Free' as the insertion point (this is the biggest
displayed insertion point).
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Delta Y The insertion offset in Y-direction. This field can only be entered if you have
selected the position 'Free' as the insertion point (this is the biggest
displayed insertion point).
Item No. An item number can be entered directly here.
Turn The shape will be rotated about its insertion axis by this value.
Length Specify the length of the shape. This is important if you want to insert shapes
in the cross-section. Inputs in this field overwrite the length specified by the
insertion points.
Create Group If set, creates a group out of the shape after insertion.
Insertion Points If set, the standard insertion points of the shape are displayed in the
monitor.
User Defined If set, the user-defined insertion points of the shape are displayed in the
Insertion Points monitor.

Opens a dialog where all relevant shape data are displayed

Feb-12 55 Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Drawing Steel Shapes in the Model

All inserted shapes are still connected with the dialog, so that subsequent
modifications can also be transferred to already inserted shapes. If you don't
want this option, you can interrupt the connection using this button.
However, the shape is not deleted in this case.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Swap Shape: All inserted shapes which are still connected with the dialog are
mirrored along their Y-axis. You will obtain this by exchanging the insertion
points.
Rotate shape: The shapes are turned either positive (turned left in shape
direction) or negative (turned right in shape direction) around their insertion
point using the entered value.

Line: Line Insertion Method, which allows the user to select one line and
then set the orientation of the shape about that line.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Along 2 Points: Prompts the user to select a start point and end point of a
shape

Along Diagonal: Inserts a shape diagonally between two points


Student: Mariano Tomasino

Prompts the user to select a start point, an end point, and an axis of rotation
for the shape

Allows selection of multiple lines. Upon selecting the lines the program will
place one shape on each line selected.

For this method of insertion, the orientation of the shape is based on a point
and the entered angle value. The length of the shape is the value entered in
the Length field. You will be prompted to select a point first and then
prompted again to enter an angle.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

You can use this option if you have indicated a fixed shape length. You are
prompted for an insertion point and for an alignment. The shape will be
inserted on the current XY-plane of the UCS with the corresponding length to
the back (into the depth).

Displays the Shape Catalog dialog, allowing the customization of the shapes
displayed for selection in the Shape Classes section

Displays the Shape Modification dialog, allowing the addition of bent or


straight segments to a straight or already bent shape

Enables the insertion of secondary beams between two existing main beams

Enables the insertion of multiple secondary shapes between primary shapes

Enables insertion of columns at selected points

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes 56 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Drawing Steel Shapes in the Model

Enables insertion of beams at gridlines. With Alt selection is via polygon,


with Control Lines in all Levels are used, otherwise only the ones at the
current UCS Plane.

Match Properties of Selected Shapes.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 57 Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Drawing Steel Shapes in the Model

 Exercise 2: Insert Steel Shapes into a Model

In this exercise, you will learn the Line and 2 Point methods of inserting shapes
into the model.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Shapes.


The ProSteel V8i Shapes dialog opens.
2 Select the Straight Shapes tab.
3 Set the parameters as shown in the figure below.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Note: Make sure to select the top center insertion point in the image of the
shape. This will insert the shape at the TOS center point
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

4 Select the Options tab.


5 Set the parameters as shown below.

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes 58 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Drawing Steel Shapes in the Model

The options provided in the Options tab are described in the following table.

Options Height: the insertion height above current XY plane.

Start Offset: the offset of shape from start point.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

End Offset: the offset of shape from end point.

Radius: the arc radius for bent shapes created from polyline.

Scale: the scale of 2D shapes.

Horizontal Offset: the distance of the shapes if a shape class has been
selected permitting an offset of several shapes in horizontal direction.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Vertical Offset: the distance of the shapes if a shape class has been selected
permitting an offset of several shapes in vertical direction.
Angular List of available insertion points for angle. Determines the insertion point if
Insertion Insert with Length under Angle is selected.
Options
Options Insert in current XY Plane: enables the insertion of shapes current XY plane.

Orientate after insertion: enable sthe orientation of shapes during insertion


using right-click.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Dynamic: enables the dynamic insertion of shapes.

Insert reference points: enables the reference point creation from insertion
points.

Insert as 2D Shape: enables 2d Shape creation.

Close dialog after insertion: enables the dialog closure after shape insertion.

Keep Length: enables the persistence of length field after dialog closure.
Secondary Beam Connect UCS Lines: enables connection of UCS lines of beams with UCS lines
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Options of main elements.

Cope: enables addition of cope to secondary beams. If set, enables you to


select a cope template from the drop-down list below.

Opens the Structural Cope dialog, which allows cope style editing.

6 Select the Straight Shapes tab.


You will now place the shape using the line inserion method.
7 Select Line.
The prompt Pick the Desired point <Line> displays.
8 Select the back left vertical frame line at column location 2A.
The prompt Click Left-Hand Mouse Button to Rotate the Shape in Position
or Enter to Accept displays.

Feb-12 59 Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Drawing Steel Shapes in the Model

9 Click until the shape rotates into the position shown below.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

10 Press Enter.
The insertion of the shape is completed.
11 Press Enter.
The command ends, and the Structural Shapes dialog displays.
12 Click the check mark.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

The dialog closes.


You will now insert another shape using the 2 point method.
13 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Shapes.
14 Define the shape as shown below.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

15 Set the same parameters in the Options tab as before.


16 Select Shapes 2 Point Insertion.
The prompt Specify Shape Start point displays.
17 Select the intersection of top level 2A.

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes 60 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Drawing Steel Shapes in the Model

The prompt Specify Shape end point displays.


18 Select the intersection of top level 2B.
The prompt Hit Left-Hand Mouse Button to Rotate the Shape in Position or
Right-Hand Mouse to Accept displays.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

19 Select Accept current Shape to prevent further changes.


This prevents further changes and allows placement of additional shapes
using different settings from this dialog, without losing the settings of the
shape just placed.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 61 Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Editing Steel Shapes and Plates

Editing Steel Shapes and Plates


Shapes and plates can be lengthened, shortened, coped, notched, divided, joined,
angle cut, and have boolean operations performed on them. There are several
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

methods available to modify shapes and plates other than by handle editing.
Manipulation commands are available in the main Structural Modify Element
dialog, accessed through the Structural > Manipulate menu.

In this section, you will become familiar with the Element Modification dialog and
its inherent functions. You will also learn to modify steel shapes and plates using
the Element Modification dialog commands.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

 Exercise 1: The Element Modification Dialog


1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Manipulate > Dialog.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Note: Every time you see this icon in a dialog, you have the option to display a
Bitmap (Graphics). However, setting the Global Dialog Settings to Expert
Mode will not show Bitmap (Graphics).
2 Familiarize yourself with the options in the Common tab, which are
described as follows.

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes 62 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Editing Steel Shapes and Plates

The Common Tab


Extend/Trim

At Line: When selected, the shape is cut at a line. This can be an


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

AutoCAD line, as well as an imaginary line created by entering the letter P as the
line that will be cut. The value you enter in the Distance field is the size of the gap
that will be created between the shape and the line.

To extend to a line: Insert a shape into the drawing and draw a line across its path
a few feet away. Select the icon to extend/trim to line. At this point it is necessary
to select the shape and once that is done, hold down the Alt key and select the
line the element should be extended to.

To trim to a line: Begin in the same manner as above by placing a shape in the
drawing, but create a crossing line that intersects the shape. Select the icon to
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

extend/trim to line. To trim to a line, select the object on the side that should be
removed then select the line itself.

At Object: When selected, the shape is cut or extended at another


shape. Before the cut takes place, the centerline of the object to be cut must
intersect some part of the shape upon which you are cutting back to. The shape
will be gapped from the cutting element by the amount you enter in the Distance
field in the main dialog.

Distance: offset to cutting line or cutting element.


Student: Mariano Tomasino

Creates Straight Cut: If set, creates a straight cut at a line or object, no matter how
these are positioned to the cut object.

To extend to an object: Extending an object/shape is fairly straightforward. Place


two shapes in the drawing; a column, and a beam going towards the column's
flange. Leave a space between them. Select the icon to extend/trim to shape.
Then select the shape to be extended (beam) and then select the shape to extend
to (column). Note that the element will extend to the point where its centerline
touches the object it is extending to.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

To trim to an object: For this example, re-create the same geometry between two
object/shapes as above, but have the beam cross past the column. Cut to shape is
done by first selecting the shape that is to be cut and then choosing the shape it
will cut against. Here the shorter side is always removed and as mentioned above,
the element will extend to the point where its centerline touches the object it is
extending to.

Feb-12 63 Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Editing Steel Shapes and Plates

Divide/
Connect

Divide: divides a shape into two shapes. The cutting line may be any
line or object. Select the shape to be divided and then the dividing line or point.
When you have entered a value in the Distance field in the main dialog, BOTH
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

new ends will be shortened this amount.

Distance: distance between elements after division.

Separate on Level: If set, you are asked for three points, which have to form a
plane. The parts are divided along this plane.

To divide, place a shape into the work area. Select the Divide icon and select the
shape. Once the shape is selected it is possible to divide it either by selecting a
point (default) or by selecting a line that crosses the shape.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

It is important to keep in mind that when selecting a point that the division will be
made from that point, perpendicular to the shape.

Connect: allows two shapes of the same type to be joined as one. They
must be exactly aligned.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Notch (Other) This function inserts simple geometrical shapes of outlets and countersunk parts
into your shapes. You can create square, wedge-type, and circular shapes using
the dialog which displays upon selecting this option.

Square Notch: To use this option, select the member and then the location on the
member where the notch should be placed. Then fill out the values for Width,
Height, and Depth, and select the position of the notch in accordance with the
point that was selected. The selected point will be indicated by a blue, yellow and
red crosshair.

Wedge Notch: Wedge works like Square does except it includes two new options,
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

'Edge Front - Edge Back' and 'Edge Top Edge Bottom':

Edge Front - Edge Back: determines whether the vertical flat side should face the
front or back, in relation to the direction that the member was drawn. For
example, if the member is drawn left to right then the vertical flat side for the
front is always to the left and the back is always to the right.

Edge Top Edge Bottom: places the horizontal flat side facing the chosen direction,
as it relates to the direction the member was drawn. If, for example, the beam is
placed in the drawing upside down (rotated 180 degrees) the 'edge bottom'
would place the flat side at the top and the 'edge top' would place the flat side at
the bottom.

Radial Notch: The radial notch works differently than Square and Wedge. It takes
into account the radius, length and angle of the cylinder. It also has the option to
use the outer or inner radius.

Position: Under this tab, the notch rotation can be adjusted along any axis. There
are options for rotating the notch by +/- 90 degrees or, if needed, a value can be
entered and +/-Phi can be used to rotate by the specified amount.

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes 64 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Editing Steel Shapes and Plates

Polycuts

Pick: Select Pick, and then select the shape to be cut. Next, select the
point of the polyline defining the boundaries of the cut.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Polyline: Select Polyline, and then select the shape to be cut. Next,
select the polyline that defines the boundaries of the cut. In this case, the polyline
must be drawn with AutoCAD and be drawn prior to initiating the polycut
command.

Subtract: This is used to subtract the volume of one shape from the
volume of another. Select Subtract, select the shape to be cut and then the shape
to act as the boundary shape.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Position: decides where to apply the cut. The options are: Complete, Only Upper
Half and Only Lower Half.

Gap: If a value is entered here, an offset from the cut line will be maintained
equal to that value.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 65 Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Editing Steel Shapes and Plates

The Shapes Tab


The options in the Shapes tab are used to modify steel shapes and plates.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The table below provides descriptions of the options available in the Shapes
tab.

Shorten Shapes

Shorten Shapes By Pick: allows you to shorten a shape by selecting


Student: Mariano Tomasino

the distance. Initiate the command and begin by selecting the shape to be
shortened. Select a starting point and an end point of the shortening, and
the shape will be shortened by this distance.

Shorten Shapes By Dimension: allows you to shorten a shape by a


distance equal to a set value. Select the shape and enter the amount by
which the shape will be shortened.

Shorten Shapes By Default: shortens the shape a distance equal to


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

the value entered in the Default field. Type a value in the Default field and
initiate the command. Select the shape to be shortened near the end you
want reduced and the shape will automatically be shortened by this amount.
If you continue to select the same element the shape will continue to be
shortened the default value.
LengthenShapes

Lengthen Shapes By Pick: the same as Shorten Shapes By Pick,


except that the shape is lengthened by the distance selected.

Lengthen Shapes By Dimension: the same as the Shorten Shapes


By Dimension, except that the shape is lengthened by a distance equal to a
set value.

Lengthen Shapes By Default: the same as Shorten Shapes By


Default, except that the shape is lengthened by a distance equal to the value
entered in the Default field.

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes 66 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Editing Steel Shapes and Plates

Cope/Notch

This copes one shape where it meets another shape. The shapes
must intersect. Once the command is initiated, select the shape to be coped,
followed by the shape upon which to cut. After selecting the shapes, a dialog
displays giving you additional options controlling the actual cope distances
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

and parameters.
Mitre Cuts

Angle Bisect: allows for mitering two shapes that are of the same
size and type. You can also define a Gap between the two mitered shapes by
entering a value in the Gap field.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Outside Edge: allows for mitering two shapes that may not be the
same size and type. You can also define a Gap between the two mitered
shapes by entering a value in the Gap field

Insert Bend: performs a miter and replaces the beveled edge with
a shape section with a radius as specified in the Radius field.

You have now finished reviewing the options of the Element Modifications
Student: Mariano Tomasino

dialog.
3 Select Cancel.
The dialog closes.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 67 Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Using the Modify Functions on Steel Shapes and Plates

Using the Modify Functions on Steel Shapes and Plates


In this section, you will use the options in the Element Modification dialog to
shorten, cope, and mitre cut steel shapes and plates.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

 Exercise 1: Shorten a Shape


1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Manipulate > Dialog.
The Element Modification dialog opens.
2 Select the Shapes tab.
3 Select Shorten Shapes By Default.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The prompt Pick Shape at End to be Shortened displays.


4 Select any shape, and notice that the shape shortens.
5 Click the check mark.
The dialog closes and the command ends.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

 Exercise 2: Angle Mitre Two Shapes That are Angled Adjacent to Each Other
1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Manipulate > Dialog.
The Element Modification dialog opens.
2 Select Angle Bisect in the Mitre Cuts group box in the dialog.
The prompt Select First Shape for Angle Cut displays.
3 Select one of the two shapes that are angled adjacent to each other.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

The prompt Select Second Shape for Angle Cut displays.


4 Select the other shape.
5 Notice the mitre that is applied to the two shapes.
6 Click the check mark.
The dialog closes.

 Exercise 3: Cut One Shape Back from Another


1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Manipulate > Dialog.
The Element Modification dialog opens.
2 Select At Object in the Extend Trim group box.
The prompt Select Shape to Cut or ESC for more Shapes to Cut displays.
3 Select one of the beams that tees into the flange of a column.

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes 68 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Using the Modify Functions on Steel Shapes and Plates

The prompt Select Shape on Which to Cut displays.


4 Select the intersecting column.
5 Notice the cutback that is applied to the beam.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

6 Take a few minutes to familiarize yourself with the other manipulation


functions.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 69 Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Module Review

Module Review
Now that you have completed this module, let’s measure what you have learned.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Questions
1 What are the most common methods of inserting shapes into a model?
2 What edits can be performed on shapes and plates?
3 Where are shape manipulation commands located?
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Answers
1 The Line method and the 2 Point method are the most commonly used
methods of inserting shapes into a model.
2 Shapes and plates can be lengthened, shortened, coped, notched, divided,
joined, angle cut, and have boolean operations performed on them.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

3 Shape manipulation commands are available in the main Structural


Modify Element dialog, accessed through the Structural > Manipulate
menu.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Drawing and Editing Shapes and Workframes 70 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Workframe
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Module Overview
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

In this chapter, you will learn how to create ProSteel V8i Workframes, modify
them, and create a Display Class in which to add the frames.

Module Prerequisites
• Basic Windows knowledge including file navigation, etc.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

• Previous experience with a 3D CAD system, preferably AutoCAD.


• Completion of previous modules in this course recommended.

Module Objectives
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

After completing this module, you will be able to:


• Create a symmetrical Workframe and a non-symmetrical Workframe.
• Edit the Workframe to change its properties and dimensional settings.
• Create and manipulate Display Classes and Area Classes.
• Assign a Workframe to the Display Classes and Area Classes.
• Cycle the Display Classes to control the view in the model.

Feb-12 71 Creating a Workframe

Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated


Creating a Workframe and Review Settings

Creating a Workframe and Review Settings


The WorkFrame is a 3D object made up of lines in the form of a square/rectangle,
cylinder/cone, or pyramid. It provides the user with the following:
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

• Routing lines for steel placement


• Automatic clipped views, for 2D drawing generation and for viewing

A structure can be modelled with one or several WorkFrames.

We strongly recommend the use of WorkFrames as often as possible, even


Company: Seibo Ingeniería

though it is possible to model a complete structure without using one.

In this section, you will learn how to create a symmetrical workframe and a non-
symmetrical workframe. You will also edit the workframe to change its properties
and dimensional settings.

 Exercise 1: Create a Symmetrical Workframe


Student: Mariano Tomasino

In this exercise, you will learn how to create and edit a workframe.
1 Create a new drawing using the template created in the Template File and
Model Setup module.
2 Select File > New.
3 Select the V8i - Imperial [US-CDN].dwt template. .
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

4 Select File > Save As > TRNMODEL.


5 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Isometric
Overview.
You will now display the ProSteel V8i Workframe dialog and place a
workframe.
6 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Additions > Workframe.

Creating a Workframe 72 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Workframe and Review Settings

The prompt Select Origin of Workframe or Enter for UCS Origin displays.
7 Right-click.
The UCS origin is accepted for the workframe and the prompt Specify X -
Axis for Workframe or Enter for UCS X Axis displays.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

8 Right-click.
The UCS X-Axis is accepted for the workframe and the ProSteel V8i
Workframe dialog displays, with the Layout tab selected.
9 Set the size and number of divisions as shown in the dialog below.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

10 Switch to the Views tab.


11 Set the parameters as shown below.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 73 Creating a Workframe


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Workframe and Review Settings

12 Set the parameters in the Text X and Text Y tabs as shown below.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Creating a Workframe 74 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Workframe and Review Settings

13 Border lines are used to add additional grid lines to the workframe.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

14 Switch to the Options tab.


15 Set the values as shown below.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

16 Switch to the Blocks tab.

Feb-12 75 Creating a Workframe


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Workframe and Review Settings

17 Set the values as shown below.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

18 Click the check mark.


The workframe is created.

 Exercise 2: View an Existing Workframe's Settings


Student: Mariano Tomasino

In this exercise, you will view a workframe's dimensional settings.


1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Isometric
Overview.
The model is set to Overview 1 view.
2 Zoom into the front left corner of the workframe just created.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

3 Select the yellow-colored Axis Description.


The AutoCAD grips are active.
4 Right-click.
The context menu displays.
5 Select the PS 3D properties option.

Creating a Workframe 76 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Workframe and Review Settings

The ProSteel V8i Workframe dialog opens. This is the same dialog used to
create the workframe. From this dialog you can change the workframe's
length, width, height, number of divisions, grid system, grid size etc.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Note: Once steel members have been placed on a workframe and the
workframe is modified, the shapes WILL NOT update to match the new
Student: Mariano Tomasino

dimensions of the workframe.


6 Click the check mark.
The model is returned with the workframe values unchanged.
7 If the grips are still active, press Esc to deactivate them.
The dimensional portion of a Workframe is known as a Structural Object. This
portion of the workframe contains all of the dimensional data necessary to
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

define its size and location. In addition to the dimensional data there is
specific frame data associated with every face (top, left, right, front, back and
all faces in-between) of the workframe. Each one of these faces is
independent of the others and can be modified separately. These individual
frames also constitute the frame sections that are automatically processed by
the 2D Detail Center.

 Exercise 3: View the Properties of an Existing Workframe


1 Make sure the model is in Overview 1 view.
2 Window into the front left corner of the workframe you created.
3 Click on the bottom front magenta-colored frame.
The AutoCAD grips are now active.
4 Right-click.
The context menu displays.

Feb-12 77 Creating a Workframe


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Workframe and Review Settings

5 Select PS 3D properties.
The Workframe Properties dialog opens. Within this dialog you can
change the display of the workframe and the name, size and spacing of
the workframe axis. You can also set the clip plane distances on the front
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

and back (or above and below) of the workframe. You can turn on the
Area Name as well as rename the complete frame, set the Camera
location and view location etc.
6 Select each tab in the dialogs shown below and view the contents, leaving
them unchanged.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Creating a Workframe 78 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Workframe and Review Settings
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

7 Click the check mark.


The dialog closes.

Feb-12 79 Creating a Workframe


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Workframe and Review Settings

 Exercise 4: Create a Non-Symmetrical Workframe

In this exercise you will use the Axis Distance method to create the non-
symmetrical workframe Bentley2. When using Axis distances you will assign each
axis (Length, Width, Height) a series of distances to form the frame.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Isometric


Overview.
The model displays in Overview 1 view.
2 Select Workframe.
The prompt Specify Origin of Workframe or right-click for UCS Origin
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

displays.
3 Select the lower back left corner of workframe Bentley.
The prompt Specify X-Axis of Workframe or Enter UCS X-Axis displays.
4 Press Enter.
5 Select the Layout tab.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

6 Make sure the Workframe Layout is set to Rectangular.


7 Make sure the options in the Dimensions and Divisions section are all
disabled.
8 Set the Length, Width, and Height values as shown below.

Note: Both the Width and Height have multiple values, to produce 2 bays wide
and 2 levels high.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

9 Select the Views tab.

Creating a Workframe 80 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Workframe and Review Settings

10 Make sure all other settings are set as shown below.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

11 Select the Text X tab.


12 Set the axis description values to match the figures below.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

13 Select the Text Y tab.


14 Set the axis description values to match the figures below.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

15 Select the Options tab.

Feb-12 81 Creating a Workframe


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Workframe and Review Settings

16 Set the parameters as shown below.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

17 Click the check mark.


The dialog closes.

You will also need to modify the axis display settings in the previous Bentley
workframe.
18 Select the yellow workframe of Bentley.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

19 Right-click.
20 Select PS3D Properties.
21 Select the Text X tab.
22 Select the individual Setting icon.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

23 Double-click on the axis A & B under the “invisible” column.

Creating a Workframe 82 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Workframe and Review Settings

An X is placed in the Invisible column, which will turn off the axis
description for each (A & B) axis.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

24 Click the check mark.


To finalize the Workframe, you will add additional construction lines for an
awning from grid C between columns 2 and 3.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

25 Zoom into the corner of the workframe at C2.


26 Trace an AutoCAD line from level 10'-0" using polar cords @120,0
27 Rotate this line to give it a 10 degree slope down.
28 Repeat at column C3 or use AutoCAD's copy command.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 83 Creating a Workframe


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Workframe and Review Settings

Your model should appear as below:


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Creating a Workframe 84 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating and Manipulating Display Classes and Area Classes

Creating and Manipulating Display Classes and Area Classes


In this section, you will learn about Display Classes and Area Classes, and how to
create them. You will also learn how to assign structural elements and objects to
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

them to make it easier to view complex models.

Display Classes
Display Classes are a ProSteel V8i tool used to separate a model into object
visibility classes.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The Display Classes command allows you to organize objects (Shapes and
Structural Objects) from different AutoCAD layers into visibility groups that are
independent from the layers they reside in.

Unlike "freezing" layers in AutoCAD, which turns off the display of the complete
layer (resulting in numerous layers to control display), Display Classes allows you
to select entire groups or just a few objects and make them visible or hidden. This
Student: Mariano Tomasino

will help simplify the view of the model displayed on the screen.

Note: Each element can exist only in one Display Class at a time. This means
that it will be removed from one class if it is assigned to another.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 85 Creating a Workframe


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating and Manipulating Display Classes and Area Classes

 Exercise 1: Create Display Classes and Assign Objects to Them

In this section, you will learn how to create display classes. Some of the display
classes you create will be used later in the modelling process.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Display Classes > Dialog.


Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

You will now assign names to the display classes.


2 Double-click on the first empty list entry.
3 Enter ***Marked Members*** in the input field.
The first display class is now named.
4 Repeat the previous two steps to assign names to Display Classes, Beams,
Columns, Struts, Wind Beams, Wall Stiffeners, Stair Stringers, Joist, Purlins,
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Girts, etc, as shown below.

Creating a Workframe 86 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating and Manipulating Display Classes and Area Classes

Area Classes
Note: Area Classes are only available with the Professional license level of ProSteel. If
using Modeler or Engineering license levels this command is not available.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

In addition to Display Classes, ProSteel V8i includes Area Class functionality to


organize and control the visibility of construction areas (work areas, construction
phases, builds, etc.). The user can create Area Classes, assign objects to those
classes, and then control the visibility of the objects by turning the Area Classes
on or off.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

 Exercise 1: Create Area Classes and Assign Objects to Them

In this section, you will learn how to create Area Classes. Some of the Area Classes
you create will be used later in the modelling process.
1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Area Classes > Dialog.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

2 Double-click on the first empty list entry.


3 Enter 1st WorkFrame in the input field.
The first Area class is now named.

Feb-12 87 Creating a Workframe


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating and Manipulating Display Classes and Area Classes

4 Repeat the process to assign names to Area Classes, as shown below.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Part Families
Note: Part Families are only available with the Professional license level of ProSteel. If
Student: Mariano Tomasino

using Modeler or Engineering license levels this command is not available.

Part Families are a mechanism used to automatically allocate prefixes, colours


and Detail Styles during the modelling/positioning process by categorizing
different types of components (e.g., columns, beams, gusset plates, etc). 2D line
types and color can also be controlled through the Part Families.

Part Families should be created and components assigned to these, and then the
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Part Family prefix should be used during positioning.

Note: Each component can belong to only one Part Family at a time.

Creating a Workframe 88 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating and Manipulating Display Classes and Area Classes

 Exercise 1: Create Part Families and Assign Objects To Them

In this section, you will learn how to create Part Families. Some of the display
classes you create will be used later in the modelling process.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Part Families > Dialog


Company: Seibo Ingeniería

2 Double-click on the first empty list entry.


Student: Mariano Tomasino

3 Enter Beam Assemblies in the input field.


The first Part Family has been named, and a new dialog appears.
4 Enter B in Pos Prefix.
5 Enter -1 in Color.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 89 Creating a Workframe


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating and Manipulating Display Classes and Area Classes

6 Repeat the process to create Part Families as shown below.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Creating a Workframe 90 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Module Review

Module Review
Now that you have completed this module, let’s measure what you have learned.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Questions
1 True or False: Display Classes allow you to select entire groups or just a
few objects and make them visible or hidden.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 91 Creating a Workframe


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Module Review

Answers
1 True or False: Display Classes allow you to select entire groups or just a
few objects and make them visible or hidden.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

True: Display classes allow you to select entire groups or just a few objects
and make them either visible or hidden.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Creating a Workframe 92 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Inserting and Manipulating
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Shapes
Module Overview
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

In this module you will learn how to insert steel into a Workframe using the Line
and 2 Point methods. After insertion you will edit the steel further, so you can
detail the joints in later chapters.

Module Prerequisites
Student: Mariano Tomasino

• Basic Windows knowledge including file navigation, etc.


• Previous experience with a 3D CAD system, preferably AutoCAD.
• Completion of previous modules in this course recommended.

Module Objectives
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

After completing this module, you will be able to:


• Insert steel shapes using the line.
• Assign a steel member to a display class.
• Insert steel shapes using the 2 point method.

Feb-12 93 Inserting and Manipulating Shapes

Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated


Inserting Steel Shapes Using the Line

Inserting Steel Shapes Using the Line


In this lesson, you will learn how to insert steel Shapes on a workframe, and you
will be introduced to the Divide command from the Manipulate menu.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

 Exercise 1: Inserting Steel Shapes Using the Line Method


1 In the ProSteel Shapes dialog, set the options as follows.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

2 Select Shape Size W12X45.


3 Select the node on the center of the shape image.
The insertion point is set to the "center of steel."
4 Select Line Insertion Method.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

The prompt Pick the Desired Point <Line> displays.


5 Select the vertical line of the workframe located at grid coordinate A1 in
the workframe Bentley.
The prompt Click Left-Hand Mouse Button to Rotate the Shape in Position
or Enter to Accept displays.

Inserting and Manipulating Shapes 94 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Inserting Steel Shapes Using the Line

6 Click to turn the shape in the direction shown below.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

7 Right-click.
The command ends.
8 Right-click.
The dialog returns.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

9 Click the check mark.


The ProSteel Shapes dialog closes.
10 Repeat this command and insert the same type and size shape (W12X45)
at grid line A2.
11 At all remaining vertical grid lines, insert W12X45 shapes.

Note: When selecting the vertical grid lines in Frame Bentley2, select the
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

vertical grid lines near the top of the frame so as not to select the
Bentley grid lines. Also remember to change the Area Class values to
2nd WorkFrame.
12 Return to the ProSteel Shapes dialog.
13 Keep the Shape Type as AISC_I_W.
14 Select size W21X44.
15 Using the Line method, insert and orient the beams on the horizontal lines
as shown in the following figure.

Feb-12 95 Inserting and Manipulating Shapes


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Inserting Steel Shapes Using the Line

Note: Make sure that the beams are inserted using the top center TOS
insertion point.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Note: Do not forget the options that need to be changed when inserting the
beams. Also remember the two different WorkFrames for Area Classes.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Your model should appear as shown below.


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Inserting and Manipulating Shapes 96 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Inserting Steel Shapes Using the Line

 Exercise 2: Modifying Steel Members with the Divide Command

In this exercise, you will learn how to divide a steel shape into multiple shapes at
column intersections. To do this, you will use the Modify and Divide commands.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

1 Select Modify.
The Element Modification dialog opens.
2 Select the Common tab.
3 Select Divide.
4 When prompted to select the shapes to be divided, select the W21X44
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

beam located between coordinates A3 to C3.


5 When prompted to pick the dividing point or line, select the column
located at coordinate B3.
The snap locates a point on the centroid axis to use as the dividing point.
6 Click the check mark.
The command is completed.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

7 Repeat the same process for the W21X44 beam coordinates A2 to C2.
8 Zoom into one of the W21X44 shapes at the intersection with the
columns.
9 Note that the element is divided into two pieces.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 97 Inserting and Manipulating Shapes


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Assigning Steel Members to a Display Class

Assigning Steel Members to a Display Class


In this lesson, you will learn how to assign members to a Display Class from within
the Display Class dialog. You will also learn how to assign shapes to a display class
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

globally by Grip editing shapes.

 Exercise 1: Assign Shapes to a Display Class Using the Display Class Dialog
1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Display Classes > Dialog.
The Display Classes dialog opens.
2 Select the Columns Class.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The Columns Class is active.


3 Select Assign.
The prompt Select objects you wish to add to the Display Class displays.
4 Select all of the columns within the model.
5 Right-click.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

The Display Classes dialog returns.


6 Turn off Columns Class.
Columns Class is removed from the display.

Note: This makes it easier to be able to select the other items.


7 Select the Beams Class.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Beams Class is now active.


8 Select Assign.
The prompt Select objects you wish to add to the Display Class displays.
9 Select all beams except the two beams located between A3, B3, and C3.
10 Right-click.
The Display Classes dialog is returned.
11 Click the check mark.
The model is returned.

Inserting and Manipulating Shapes 98 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Assigning Steel Members to a Display Class

 Exercise 2: Assign Shapes to a Display Class using Grip Editing


1 Select the two W21X44 beams located along A3 and B3.
Their Grips are highlighted.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

2 Right-click.
The Shape Properties dialog appears.
3 Select the Assignments tab.
4 Select Beams in the Display Class list.
5 Click the check mark.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The model is returned.


6 Add the remaining shapes to the respective display class in the same
manner (i.e. beams on B3 and C3).
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 99 Inserting and Manipulating Shapes


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Inserting Steel Shapes Using the 2 Point Method

Inserting Steel Shapes Using the 2 Point Method


 Exercise 1: Insert Steel Shapes Using the 2 Point Method
1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Shapes.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

The ProSteel Shapes dialog opens.


2 Select Shape Type AISC_I_W.
3 Select Shape Size W16X31.
4 Select the node on the center of the top flange on the shape image.
The insertion point is set to the "top center of steel".
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

5 Select the Options tab.


6 Ensure that the Orientate after insertion option is set.
7 Select the Along 2 Points method of insertion.
8 Zoom in on the intersection of the column at coordinate B2 and the
existing beams.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

A prompt displays asking you to select the insertion point of the shape.
9 Select the WorkFrame at B2 at Level 2.
You will now select the second insertion point.
10 Transparently zoom to the column at coordinate B3.
11 Select the WorkFrame intersection at that point.
12 Right-click.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

The rotation of the shape is accepted.


13 Right-click.
The dialog is returned.
14 Click the check mark.
The command ends.
15 Fill the rest of the structure at level 2.

Inserting and Manipulating Shapes 100 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Inserting Steel Shapes Using the 2 Point Method

Your model should now appear as shown below:


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 101 Inserting and Manipulating Shapes


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Inserting Steel Shapes Using the 2 Point Method

 Exercise 2: Insert Remaining Steel Shapes


1 Add the awning beams, as W6X25, from columns B3 and C3, using the
previously drawn construction lines.
2 Assign these beams to their respective display classes.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

3 Save the model.


The model should appear as shown below.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Inserting and Manipulating Shapes 102 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Module Review

Module Review
Now that you have completed this module, let’s measure what you have learned.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Questions
1 How do you assign shapes to a display class using grip editing?
2 How do you assign shapes to a display class from within the Display Class
dialog?

Answers
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

1 Use grip editing to assign shapes to a display class by 1) selecting the item
to activate its grips 2) right-clicking to access the Shape Properties dialog
3) selecting the Assignments tab, and 4) selecting the class in the Display
Class list.
2 Assign shapes to a display class from within the Display Class dialog by 1)
selecting the Display Class you want to assign the shapes to 2) selecting
the Assign icon, and 3) selecting the shapes to be assigned to the selected
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Display Class.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 103 Inserting and Manipulating Shapes


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Module Review

104 Inserting and Manipulating Shapes


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
Creating Connections Between
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Elements
Module Overview
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

In this module, you will learn to create an end plate connection, add design
features to it, and use grip editing to modify it.

Module Prerequisites
• Basic Windows knowledge including file navigation, etc.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

• Previous experience with a 3D CAD system, preferably AutoCAD.


• Completion of previous modules in this course recommended.

Module Objectives
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

After completing this module, you will be able to:


• Create an end plate connection.
• Add design features to an end plate connection.
• Use grip editing to modify an existing end plate connection.
• Manually modify a connection and add common bolts to two back-to-back
end plate connections.

Feb-12 105 Creating Connections Between Elements

Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated


Creating a Basic End Plate Connection

Creating a Basic End Plate Connection


 Exercise 1: Create a Basic End Plate Connection
In this exercise, you will learn how to create a basic End Plate connection and
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

add design features.


1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Isometric
Overview.
The standard isometric view displays.
2 Zoom into the joint between the column W12X45 and Beams W21X44 at
coordinate A1.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

3 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Connections > End Plates >
Endplates Normal.
The prompt Select the Shape to Connect displays.
4 Select the W21X44 member running along Axis 1.
The prompt Select support shape or <RETURN> for no support shape
Student: Mariano Tomasino

displays.
5 Select the column that the beam is to be connected to.
The ProSteel Endplates dialog displays.
6 Set the parameters in the Layout tab, as shown below.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Creating Connections Between Elements 106 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Basic End Plate Connection

The following table describes the fields in the Layout tab:

Layout of Plate This option lets you choose from the following connection types:

- Automatic: The program makes the distinction between a spliced / butt or


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

normal plate connection. An angle of approx. 45° is assumed to be the


critical angle.

- Splice: The connection is always a splice connection.

- Normal: The connection is always a normal plate connection.

- Flange: The connection has a plate welded to its flanges.


Plate Specifies the basic dimensions of the connecting plate:
Dimensions
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

- Doubler Plate: If set, two connecting plates of the same size are created.

- Width: width of the plate (in case of I shapes, parallel to the shape flange).

- Thickness: thickness of the plate.

- Length: fixed length of the plate independent of the shape height.

- Offset Top/Offset: If the length contains the value 0, you can enter the plate
length variably here as distance from the upper and lower edge of the
selected shape.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

As Polyplate If set, indicates that plates are created using a flat steel or polyplates.
Rotate If set, rotates the connection upside down.
Connection
Plates Equal When the Doubler Plate option is set, this forces both plates to be identical
in form.

This retrieves the dimension of the plate from a shape.


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

This sets the dimensions of the second plate to those of the first plate.

Gap This specifies that an indicated space is left between the supporting shape
and the plate. This allows you to consider finishing tolerances.

Plate Offset Horizontal: The complete plate connection is shifted by this distance, parallel
to the flange of the connecting shape.

Vertical: The complete plate connection is shifted by this distance, parallel to


the web of the connecting shape.

Feb-12 107 Creating Connections Between Elements


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Basic End Plate Connection

7 Set the parameters in the Holes tab, as shown below.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Creating Connections Between Elements 108 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Basic End Plate Connection

The Holes tab determines the dimensions from the top of the end plate. The
following table describes the fields in the Holes tab:

Without Holes If set, causes the connecting plate to be entered without drill holes
Vertical The fields in this group box determine the number of vertical drill holes in
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

the plate and their spacing in a vertical direction.

Asymmetrical: If set, allows you to determine the distances of the holes.


Otherwise, a symmetrical distribution is determined according to the
defaults.

Number: You can select between 1 and 10 drill holes.

Vertical Hole Pattern: The drill hole spacing in a vertical direction (height) is
determined. Depending on the entry, the values have different meanings.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Examples are given at the end of the command description. There are three
options:

- Upside: the distance of the upper row of holes from the plate's upper edge.

- Middle: the distance of the first and second row of holes from the upper
and lower plate edge. If 0, the holes will be distributed uniformly between
the two outer holes. If greater than 4, the other rows of holes will be
arranged in the same manner.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

- Downside: the distance of the lowest row of holes from the plate's lower
edge. Note: If the value in the Downside and Upside field is 0, only the
Middle box entry will be used.

Offset: You can enter a simultaneous shifting of all rows of holes with respect
to the plate upper edge here. When entering negative values, shifting will be
carried out with respect to the plate lower edge. If Asymmetrical is set, the
structure of the hole pattern input changes and a list with an input field
appears. Depending on the number of holes, you can determine each
distance individually by selecting the position in the list and by specifying the
distance in the input field. Additionally, you can determine whether the
distribution starts from the upper or lower plate edge, depending on the
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

checked field upper edge or lower edge.

Measured from: determines whether the distribution starts from the upper
or lower plate edge. If Asymmetrical is set, this determines where the hole
offsets are measured. These options are provided: Upper Edge Plate, Upper
Edge Shape, and Lower Edge Shape.

Feb-12 109 Creating Connections Between Elements


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Basic End Plate Connection

Horizontal Number: the number of horizontal drill holes in the plate.

The remaining fields determine the horizontal spacing of the drill holes in
the plate:

Left: the distance between the outer left row of holes and the central left
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

row of holes, if the number of rows is 4

Middle: the distance between the two inner rows of holes. The rows of holes
are generally arranged centrally, unless they are offset by an entry in the
Offset field.

Right: the distance between the outer right row of holes and the central
right row of holes, if the number of rows is 4.

Offset: simultaneous shifting of all rows of holes with respect to the right
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

plate. When entering negative values, shifting is carried out with respect to
the left plate edge.

8 Set the parameters in the Connect tab, as shown below.


Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Creating Connections Between Elements 110 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Basic End Plate Connection

The following table describes the fields in the Connect tab:

Bolt Settings Bolt Style: allows you to select the type of bolts (e.g., 8.8S) to be used for the
connection.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Bolt Style icon: dialog allowing you to create/edit Bolt styles.

Dia: the bolt diameter

Workloose: the required hole diameter of the bolted connection, in most


cases +2 mm.
Weld Settings Weld Style: the type of weld to be used for the connection.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Weld Style icon: dialog allowing you to create/edit Weld styles.

Weld Flange Side: If set, you can enter the thickness of the welding seam on
the flange side.

Weld Web Side: If set, you can enter the thickness of the welding seam on
the web side.

Welding marks can be subsequently assigned to the welding seams.


Student: Mariano Tomasino

9 Set the parameters in the Group tab, as shown below.


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 111 Creating Connections Between Elements


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Basic End Plate Connection

The following table describes the fields in the Group tab:

Group and Cope Create Group: If set, the plate and the shape to be connected are arranged
to form a group in this field. The plate is allocated to another group, if the
shape is already part of that group. The same applies to the supporting
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

shape and the associated stiffeners.

With Bolts - assigns the bolts for the connected shape to the group.

With Welds - assigns the welds for the connected shape to the group.
Safety Copes Top Left: leaves a gap in the angle in the upper left side.

Top Right: leaves a gap in the angle in the upper right side.

Bottom Left: leaves a gap in the angle in the bottom left side.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Bottom Right: leaves a gap in the angle in the bottom right side.

10 Set the parameters in the Assignment tab, as shown below.


Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

11 Click the check mark.


The end plate is placed.
12 Repeat the same procedure to place the same end plate on the opposite
end of the W21X44 beam.

 Exercise 2: Create an End Plate Connection with an Inherent Gusset Plate


In this exercise, you will learn how to create an End Plate connection with a
gusset plate on the lower surface of the beam.
1 Zoom to the intersection of the three W21X44 beams with the W12X45
column located at coordinate A2.
2 Select Endplate.

Creating Connections Between Elements 112 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Basic End Plate Connection

The prompt Select the Shape to Connect displays.


3 Select the W21X44 member running along Axis 2.
The prompt Select support shape or <RETURN> for no support shape
displays.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

4 Select the column.


The ProSteel Endplates dialog displays.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 113 Creating Connections Between Elements


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Basic End Plate Connection

5 Set the parameters in each tab as shown below.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Creating Connections Between Elements 114 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Basic End Plate Connection

Note: Do not forget to set each plate's information in the Assignment tab.
The following table provides a description of the fields within the Bt. Train tab:

Select Haunch Specifies the position of the haunch as well as any additional stiffeners
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

- Top Haunch: If selected, the haunch is created on the topside of the shape
to be connected.

- Bottom Haunch: If selected, the haunch is created on the bottom side of


the shape to be connected.
Coped Shape If set, creates the bottom train from a coped shape
Rectangular If set, creates a rectangular web plate
Plate
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Normal to If set, cuts the web plate parallel to the supporting shape. Only available
Column when the Coped Shape option is set.
As Polyplate If set, creates the flange of the bottom train as polyplate
Stiffener in If set, stiffeners are added to the support shape. These stiffeners are created
Support Shape in addition to those created together with the connection.
Stiffener in If set, additional stiffeners are added to the connection shape.
Connect Shape
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 115 Creating Connections Between Elements


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Basic End Plate Connection

Shape Size Specifies the haunch plates (plates).

If Coped Shape is set, the haunch is not created from individual plates but
from one cropped shape. The shape size corresponds with the connection
shape. All other shape size fields are then insignificant.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Flange Width: width of the haunch flange if the haunch is designed from
plates.

Flange Thickness: thickness of the haunch flange if the haunch is designed


from plates.

Web Thickness: thickness of the haunch web plate if the haunch is designed
from plates.
Dimensions Specifies the exterior haunch dimensions. A bitmap illustrating the
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

dimensions is available by selecting the Hide Graphics icon at the bottom of


the dialog. Different illustrations will display depending on the type of shape
size you select. The dimension numbers will correspond with the field
numbers in the dialog.

Haunch Length: Sets the length of the bottom train.

Cut Width: cut height in the connecting shape.

Top Height: top of the height of the web plate.


Student: Mariano Tomasino

Flange Width: width of the flange of the bottom train.

Flange Thickness: thickness of the flange of the bottom train.

Plate Thickness: web plate thickness.

Facet Size: facets on the web plate on the inner edges.

Facet Horizontal: the horizontal facet on the outer edge of the web plate.
Only available when the Rectangular Plate option is set.

Facet Vertical: the vertical facet on the outer edge of the web plate. Only
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

available when the Rectangular Plate option is set.

Supp. Plate Width: width of the supporting plate beneath the coped shape.

Supp. Plate Length: enables the input of the strength plate underneath the
coped shape.

Supp. Plate Thick: thickness of the supporting shape underneath the coped
shape.

Supp. Shape as Poly: if set, creates a supporting plate as polyplate.

Creating Connections Between Elements 116 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Basic End Plate Connection

 Exercise 3: Place Another End Plate


1 Repeat the previous exercise to place another end plate with a haunch on
the other end of the same beam.
2 Set your model to a BENTLEY2_Y_2 view.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

The model should appear as shown below.


Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 117 Creating Connections Between Elements


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Basic End Plate Connection

 Exercise 4: Create an End Plate Connection with Two Inherent Gusset Plates
In this exercise, you will learn how to create an end plate connection with a
gusset plate on the upper and lower surface of the beam.
1 Return to an Overview 1 view.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

2 Zoom to the intersection of the three W21X44 beams with the W12X45
column located at coordinate B2.
3 Select Endplate.
The prompt Select the Shape to Connect displays.
4 Select the W21X44 member running along Axis 2.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The prompt Select support shape or <RETURN> for no support shape


displays.
5 Select the column.
The ProSteel EndPlates dialog displays.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Creating Connections Between Elements 118 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Basic End Plate Connection

6 Set the parameters as shown below.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 119 Creating Connections Between Elements


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Basic End Plate Connection
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Note: Again, do not forget to set each plate's information in the Assignment
tab.
7 Click the check mark.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

The plates are placed.


8 Repeat the procedure to place another end plate with gusset plates on the
other end of the same beam.
Your model should appear as shown below. (Bentley2_Y_2 view)
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Creating Connections Between Elements 120 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Basic End Plate Connection

 Exercise 5: Create End Plate Connections at the Remaining Intersections


In this exercise you will finish building end plate connections between beams
and columns.
1 Select Endplate at the intersection of all W21X44 beams with the column
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

WEBS.
2 Create an End Plate connection with the following parameters:
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Note: The other parameters in this dialog should remain unchanged.


3 Select Endplate at the Intersection of the W16X31 (located in the TOP
elevation of workframe Bentley2) with the column WEBS.

Feb-12 121 Creating Connections Between Elements


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Basic End Plate Connection

4 Create End Plate connections with the following parameters:


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Note: The remaining settings for these endplates will remain unchanged.
5 Click the check mark.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

The endplate is placed.


6

 Exercise 6: Create End Plate Connection with the Awning Beams

In this exercise you will add end plate connections to the awning beams
connecting to the column flange.
1 Select the End Plate at the intersection of the 200UB25 beam with the
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

column flange 310UC97 at coordinate C3.


2 Create an End Plate connection with the following parameters.

Creating Connections Between Elements 122 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Basic End Plate Connection
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Note: The other parameters in this dialog should remain unchanged.


3 Perform the same action on the other beam, then click the check mark.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 123 Creating Connections Between Elements


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Modifying Connections Using Grip Editing

Modifying Connections Using Grip Editing


 Exercise 1: Use Grips to Modify an Existing End Plate Connection
1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Isometric
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Overview.
The standard isometric view displays.
2 Zoom into the joint between the column and beams at coordinate A1.
3 Select the W21X44 beam running along Axis 1.
Its grips are highlighted.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

4 Right-click.
5 Select PS 3D Properties.
The Shape Properties dialog displays.
6 Select the LogLinks tab.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

7 Click the arrow buttons until you find the End Plate located at this
intersection.

Note: The number and description of the link changes as you cycle through the
available links. Also note that in the model, as you move from end plate
to end plate, the intersecting column at the connection will highlight.
This is your indication that this is the joint that will be edited.
8 Select Edit.
The edit dialog displays.

Creating Connections Between Elements 124 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Modifying Connections Using Grip Editing

9 Edit the connection as indicated below, changing the Offset in the Plate
Dimensions and the bolts definition.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

10 Click the check mark.


The changes are applied, and the dialog closes.
11 Click the arrows to cycle to the End Plate connection located at the other
end of the same beam.
12 Modify it in the same manner.
13 Set your model to a Bentley_Y_1 view.

Feb-12 125 Creating Connections Between Elements


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Modifying Connections Using Grip Editing

The front frame should appear as shown below.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Hint: When the desired result has the plate extended beyond the limits of the
beam, the offset value will be a negative number. This is true in all cases
including an offset on the top side of the beam. Positive numbers are
used only when the plate needs to be smaller in height than the
intersecting beam.
The editing of a connection can also be accessed by selecting the connecting
plate (activating its grips), right-clicking, and selecting the PS3D Change
Connection option from the context menu.

 Exercise 2: Manually Modify Elements to Change a Connection

Creating Connections Between Elements 126 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Modifying Connections Using Grip Editing

In this exercise, you will manually delete the bolts and then bolt the
connection together using the correct bolt length. The new length needs to be
long enough to accommodate both end plates and the column web thickness.
1 Return to an Overview 1 view.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

2 Zoom to the joint between the beams and the column located at
coordinate A2.
3 Use the AutoCAD Erase command to erase the bolts that exist between
the connections of both beams on Axis A and the column.

Note: Each connection that was created at this location added a set of bolts to
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

the connection if the global options were not set properly. Otherwise
the connection should already be using one single set of bolts.
Now that the bolts have been manually deleted, you will need to bolt the
connection together using the correct length bolt. The new length needs to be
long enough to accomodate both end plates and the column web thickness.
4 Select ProSteel > Bolts.
The ProSteel Bolt Styles dialog displays.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

5 Select the Bolting tab.


6 Set the values as shown below.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

The following field provides a description of the fields in the Bolting tab.

Bolt Style Bolt type (e.g., 8.8S) for the bolted connections. The different bolt types are
filed in databases, allowing you to add self-defined types.
Single Hole Bolt If set, bolts are also defined for single holes. Normally, two opposite drill
holes with their tolerances defined in Geometry Setting are necessary for
bolting.

Feb-12 127 Creating Connections Between Elements


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Modifying Connections Using Grip Editing

Create dynamic If set, all involved elements are created with a logical link. Thus the bolting
Connection can be automatically adapted if a component is modified.
Bolt Settings Diameter: Enter the diameter for the bolt(s) to be used in the connection.

Workloose: Enter the desired hole clearance of the bolted connection, in


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

most cases 2 mm.

Length Addition: You can enter a length addition to the grip of the bolt,
which will be taken into consideration when selecting the bolts.
Tolerances Gap: Enter the distance up to which two drill holes can be considered as
matching and the component parts concerned can be bolted together, in
most cases 2 mm.

Angle: Enter the angle difference of two hole axes, up to which two drill
holes can be considered to be well-aligned and the component parts
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

concerned can be bolted together, in most cases 1°.

Hint: You should not adjust this value to 0, since in some cases this would
prevent bolt fastening due to an inexact calculation, although in practical
application a connection would be possible.
Bolting: Creates the connections. For this purpose, select all components to
be connected according to the defined mode (maximum of 50 parts in one
operation). Then the program defines the possible bolt settings and inserts
the bolts into the model.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Single Bolt: Inserts a single bolt at the desired position.

Turn: Rotates selected inserted bolts for mounting reasons.

7 Select the Bolt Style tab.


8 Set the values as shown below.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Creating Connections Between Elements 128 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Modifying Connections Using Grip Editing

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Bolt Style tab:

Bolt Style Displays the selected style name


Additional Parts The options along the left side of the display determine the components of
the bolt connection. Checked items will appear in the display to the right.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Option Icons The icons on the right side display dialogs that provide more detailed
information about the corresponding component. The bolt icon will always
be enabled. For all other component icons, you must first set the check box
for the corresponding component on the left side of the dialog in order to
enable the icon.

Save: Saves the bolt style in the drawing. Please note that you have to save
the style here first and in the drawing later as well, to keep the information.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Load from File: Loads a bolt style from a file you received (e.g. from another
user).

9 Select Save.
The style is saved in the drawing.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Note: New Bolt Styles can be created through the Sort tab of the dialog. Once
created and saved, they will be added to the Bolt Style list.
10 Select the Bolting tab.
11 Select Bolting.
The prompts Select all Parts to be Bolted (max 50) displays.
The prompt Select Objects also displays.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

12 Select the column.


13 Select BOTH end plates.
14 Press Enter.
Bolts are inserted, and the ProSteel Bolt Styles dialog is returned.
15 Click the check mark.
The dialog closes.

Hint: You should not perform this type of operation until ready to begin the
detailing or creation of an MTO. After performing this operation, any
editing performed on the End Plate connections via the Logical Links
modification procedure will re-insert bolts for each end plate. This will
double the quantity of bolts if the global settings are not set to allow
back-to-back connections.

Feb-12 129 Creating Connections Between Elements


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Modifying Connections Using Grip Editing

You will need to manually add the bolts to the construction group if
required.
16 Select File > Save.
Your model should appear as shown in the following figure.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Creating Connections Between Elements 130 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Module Review

Module Review

Questions
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

1 The Layouts tab lets you choose one of four possible connection types in
the Layout of Plate field. Name the four connection types.
2 What are the two types of connections assigned in the Connect tab?
3 What are the four tabs in the Bolt Styles dialog?
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Answers
1 The four connection types are: Automatic, Splice, Normal, and Flange.
2 The Bolt and Weld connections are assigned in the Connect tab.
3 The Bolt Styles dialog tabs are: Bolting, Threaded Rods, Bolt Style, and
Sort.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 131 Creating Connections Between Elements


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Module Review

132 Creating Connections Between Elements


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
Creating Base Plates and Cross
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Bracing
Module Overview
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

In this module, you will learn to create an end plate connection, add design
features to it, and use grip editing to modify it.

Module Prerequisites
• Basic Windows knowledge including file navigation, etc.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

• Previous experience with a 3D CAD system, preferably AutoCAD.


• Completion of previous modules in this course recommended.

Module Objectives
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

After completing this module, you will be able to:


• Use the Base Plate command to insert base plates on a column.
• Create base plates using the Plate command.
• Use the Drill command.
• Create dynamic cross bracing and static bracing.

Feb-12 133 Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing

Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated


Creating Base Plates on Columns

Creating Base Plates on Columns


In this lesson, you will learn how to use the Base Plate command to insert Base
plates on a column. You will also create Base Plates using the Plate command in
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

conjunction with the Modify functions to shorten shapes.

 Exercise 1: Using the Base Plate Command to Insert Base Plates at Columns
1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Isometric
Overview.
2 Zoom in on the bottom end of the column at coordinate A1.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

3 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Connections > Baseplates.


The prompt Select the Shape to connect displays.
4 Select the column near the bottom end.
5 Set the values in the Layout tab of the ProSteel DSTV Baseplate dialog as
shown below.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing 134 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Base Plates on Columns

Baseplate Dialog Fields


These fields are found on the bottom of the Baseplate dialog for every tab:

Available This list contains base plates for the selected supporting shape under
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Standard Selection Templates. These are defined according to the standard DAST
Baseplates guidelines.

The values in the fields are displayed and can be changed. When you select a
plate, the base plate is immediately attached; you can then directly check
the result and make modifications, if necessary.

Note: The plate width and the plate height refer to vertical supports. The
values are correspondingly increased to maintain the shape edges in the
case of inclined supports.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Clone
Select this to apply the data of an already existing base plate to a new plate.
This requires that you select Existing Base Plate.

Layout Tab Fields


Dimensions Selected Column: the column selected for baseplate.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Plate Width: width of the base plate (parallel to the support flange), related
to a vertical supporting shape.

Plate Height: height of the base plate, related to a vertical supporting shape.

Plate Thickness: thickness of the base plate.

Grout Thickness: Enter the grout thickness, or how high the plate will be
above the current Niveou.
Options Align Plate to Shape Normal: If set, the base plate will be entered vertically
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

to the longitudinal in Profile Direction: axis of the support in this field. If not,
the base plate will be aligned parallel to the x/y axis of the WCS, if it is a
"real" support.

Shorten Column: If set, the supporting shape is shortened by the plate


thickness and the grout space underneath in this field. Otherwise, the base
plate is fastened to the support. The point of reference is determined by the
shape axis in the case of inclined supports.

Form Group: If set, the base plate and the support member are arranged to
form a group in this field. If the support member is already part of another
group, the base plate is assigned to that group.

As Polyplate: If set, the base plate is always aligned parallel towards the x/y-
plane and the smallest torsion is searched. Otherwise it is aligned parallel to
the flanges.

6 Select the Holes tab.

Feb-12 135 Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Base Plates on Columns

7 Set the values in the Holes tab as shown below.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Holes Tab Fields

Inner Holes Drill Inner Holes: If set, lets you create inner holes using the settings below:

- Hole distance: Enter the width of the inner holefield, or 0 if you only want
Student: Mariano Tomasino

holes in the Height.

- Hole distance: Enter the Height of the inner holefield, or 0 if you only want
holes in the width.

- Hole diameter: Enter the diameter of the inner holefield.


Outer Holes Drill Outer Holes: If set, lets you create outer holes according to the settings
below:

- Number: In these two fields, input the number of desired holes in the outer
Holefield.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

- Holefield width: Enter the total width of the outer holefield.

- Holefield height: Enter the total height of the outer holefield.

- Hole diameter: Enter the diameter of the outer holefield.

8 Select the Connect tab.

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing 136 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Base Plates on Columns

9 Set the values in the Connect tab as shown below.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Connect Tab Fields


Bolts With Tie Bolts: If set, the anchor bolts are displayed by symbols and can be
entered in the parts list.

With Anchor bolts outside: If set, inserts anchor bolts in the outer holefield
Student: Mariano Tomasino

also.

Label: description for the anchor bolts.

Use Dowel: If set, use Anchor Dowels instead of a symbolic bolt. The dowels
are stored in a database which is defined in the field below. The browse
allows you to navigate to the desired database.
Weld Settings Weld Style: Define the weld style to be used in this field.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Weld Style icon: dialog allowing you to create/edit Weld styles.

Weld Flange Side: Set this option to use welds on the flange side of the
connection shape. The thickness field next to this option allows you to enter
the thickness of the weld if you want to override the weld style thickness.

Weld Web Side: Set this option to use welds on the web side of the
connection shape. The thickness field next to this option allows you to enter
the thickness of the weld if you want to override the weld style thickness.

10 Select the Dowels tab.

Feb-12 137 Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Base Plates on Columns

11 Set the values in the Dowels tab as shown below.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

12 Select the Assignment tab.


13 Set the values in the Assignment tab as shown below.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

14 Click the check mark.


15 Repeat this process on the column at coordinate B1, A2, B2, A3, and B3.

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing 138 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Base Plates on Columns

 Exercise 2: Prepare the Element for a Manual Base Plate


There may be times when using the Base Plate command may not be the best
method of adding a base plate. In these situations you can create the base
plate by shortening the column using the Modify command and then inserting
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

the plate using the plate functions.


1 Zoom to the standard Isometric View.
2 Zoom in on the base of column located at coordinate C2.
3 Open the Element Modification dialog.
4 Select the Shapes tab.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

You will use the Shorten Shapes by Default function to shorten the column by
a distance equal to the fabricated base plate thickness.
5 Set the Default field value to 1 1/8".
6 Select Shorten Shapes By Default.
The prompt Select shape at the End to be shortened displays.
7 Select the column near the end.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

The column is shortened by 1 1/8".

Hint: Before using the Shorten by Default function, make sure to window in on
the element to be shortened. As the command automatically shortens
the column when picked, you may not notice when zoomed out that the
element has been shortened, and you may pick the same element
twice, thus shortening the shape a second time.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

8 Click the check mark.


The dialog closes.
9 Using the same function, shorten the column located at coordinate C3.

Feb-12 139 Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Base Plates on Columns

 Exercise 3: Create a Base Plate Using the Plates Command


1 Remain zoomed in on the column at coordinate C3.
2 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Plates > Plates.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

3 In the ProSteel Plates/Polyplates dialog set the parameters as shown


below.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Note: Make sure to select the CENTER insertion point in the image of the
plate.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing 140 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Base Plates on Columns

The following table provides a description of the fields in the ProSteel Plates/
Polyplates dialog.

Dimensions Length: sets the plate length if the plate is rectangular.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Width: sets the plate width if the plate is rectangular.

Thickness: thickness of the plate to be created. Enter a value or select a value


from the list.

Height Offset: The insertion plane of the plate is moved by this value in
negative direction towards the reference plane (active UCS or element UCS).

X-Offset: sets the plate X-Offset if the plate is rectangular.


Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Y-Offset: sets the plate Y-Offset if the plate is rectangular.

Item No.: changes the Plate article number.

If the Current Layer field is set, the plates are not inserted in the plate level
(default is PS_PLATE) but rather in the current AutoCAD layer.

Grid: If set, an additional grid is visible at the upper side to display gridirons,
for example.
Insert Plane Here you indicate the reference plane for the insertion of the plate. These
Student: Mariano Tomasino

options are available:

- Current UCS: The corner points of the polyline are referenced with the
current UCS when creating the plate if you have selected the contour Adapt
Contour. This is the standard case if the drawn polyline is located within the
UCS.

- Object UCS: The element UCS of the polyline is considered to be the


reference plane when creating the plate if you have selected the Insert on
Polygon button near the bottom of the screen. Use this setting if the polyline
is not located in the current UCS and you want to insert a plate to it.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

- User Defined Plane: This is defined by two lines (which you have to select).
Thus, this will allow you to align a plate on a shape. This works when you
create a plate by selecting points.
Insert Edge Determines the insertion plane of the plate. The options are: Top, Middle, or
Bottom. Please note that the values for the insertion height apply up to this
plane.

Feb-12 141 Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Base Plates on Columns

Options Label: allows you to select the name of the polyplate.

Material: Choose the material from this list, which will be associated with
the plate in the parts list.

Display Class: enables the selection of the Display Class of the plate.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Description: enables the selection of the Free Description of the plate.

Layer: enables you to select the Level for the plate.


Placement
Options
Insert Polypoint: inserts a polypoint by specified points.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Insert on Polygon: inserts a plate by a selected polygon, circle or


arc.

Insert Rectangular Plate on Point: inserts a rectangular plate on an


insertion point.

Insert Rectangular Plate on Diagonal: inserts a rectangular plate on


a selected diagonal.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Insert Rectangular Plate on Line: inserts a rectangular plate along a


line.

Four Points: determines the form of the plate by picking any four
points in the space you like. The first three points determine at the same
time the insertion plane of the plate. The fourth point is plumbed towards
this plane. Thus you have the possibility to create a plate without setting the
UCS before.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Steel into Poly: transforms already inserted flat steel shapes into
plates. This can sometimes be useful, if you want to carry out modifications
which cannot be made with a shape.

Template: allows the user to name and save the current settings as
a template that can be recalled later.

Dimension: re-specifies the reference line for the plate length.

Grid: re-specifies the reference line for the plate grid.

Additional Flange: enables creation of additional flanges to a plate.

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing 142 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating Base Plates on Columns

4 Select Insert Rectangular Plate on Point at the bottom of the dialog.


The prompt Pick Insert point of the Rectangular Plate displays.
5 Select the bottom shape point of the column.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

The plate is created and the dialog is returned.


6 Repeat the process on the column located at coordinate C2.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 143 Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Drilling the Base Plate to Accommodate Anchor Bolts

Drilling the Base Plate to Accommodate Anchor Bolts


In this lesson, you will learn to use the Drill command.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

 Exercise 1: Drill the Base Plate


Now that you have inserted the base plates you will need to drill these to
accommodate anchor bolts using the Drill command.
1 Zoom to the standard Isometric View.
2 Zoom into the area of the base plate located at the base of the column at
coordinate C2.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

3 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Drill.


The ProSteel Drill dialog opens.
4 Set the parameters shown below.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing 144 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Drilling the Base Plate to Accommodate Anchor Bolts

The following table provides a description of the fields in the dialog.

Hole Field Layout: sets the layout type for the hole field, with these options:
Description
- Rectangular: The drill holes are arranged as a rectangle with rows and
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

columns around the insertion point.

- Radial: The drill holes are arranged in a complete or partial circle around
the insertion point. When this option is selected, additional input fields will
be displayed as shown in the dialog by means of which round drill hole fields
can be determined.

- Single Holes: The drill hole description is ignored, and you can drill
individual holes into the shape.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Shape/X Dir: description of drill hole field in shape direction, for plates in x
direction of the UCS. Details on how to describe a drill hole field are given on
the next page.

Cross/Y-Dir: description of drill hole field perpendicular to the shape


direction, for plates in y direction of the UCS.

Num/Radius: The Number field contains the number of drill holes to be


created. The Radius field contains the radius which the drill holes are
distributed around the insertion point.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Area/Start: The Area field contains the number of degrees that the bolt
holes are to be distributed around (for instance the value 180 for a
semicircle). If you enter the value 0, the complete circle will be used. In the
Start field, you can enter an angle of the first drill hole towards the insertion
X-axis of the component, if the partial circle has to be rotated.

If the Show Pitchlines or Show Centerline field is checked (in the Settings
tab), the midline, gravity line, and tracing dimensions could be displayed
after selecting the shape. The axes are removed again after the drilling has
concluded.
Data Diameter: Enter the hole diameter here.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Workloose: addition to the hole diameter as entered, e.g., for galvanizing.

Slot Length: If a value bigger than 0 has been entered here, the hole is drilled
as a slotted hole. The entered value determines the distance between the
two holes which are drilled as slotted holes.

In case of a slotted hole, two drill holes with a pitch as entered in the input
field will be created, and the space in-between will be cut out.

Feb-12 145 Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Drilling the Base Plate to Accommodate Anchor Bolts

Layout and Hole Type: The following options are available:


Position
- Drill Through: The material will be completely drilled through. (If a top
flange is drilled, the bottom flange will not be drilled through.)

- Drill Blink Hole: The drill hole has the depth entered in the Hole Depth field.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

- Weld marks: Small holes are spot-drilled for marking add-on pieces.
Dimensioning of these small holes can be carried out automatically.

Flange Selection: The following options are available:

- Upper chord: The flange which is "reached first by the drill" will be drilled.

- Lower chord: The second flange which is "reached by the drill" will be
drilled. This function allows a bottom flange from the top view to be drilled
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

on the shape.

- Both chords: Both flanges are drilled.

At Shape Center: If set, all points on the shape centerline are put
perpendicular to the shape center.

Create Threaded Hole: If set, creates a threaded hole. This will appear
differently in 2D.
Insert Holes into an Object: You can insert the complete hole field or several
Student: Mariano Tomasino

single holes into one shape, by selecting the shape or the plate and then
selecting or typing the hole field insertion point.

You can insert different single holes until you right-click or press Enter. All
holes will be drilled now.
Insert Holes into Several Objects: You can insert holes in several shapes at
the same time, e.g., when shapes are placed upon each other, and a hole for
a through rod will be drilled. First, select all desired shapes or plates and
then drill the holes as described in Single.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Each of the selected shapes being hit by an imaginary beam that starts at the
inserted drill holes (in both directions, the beam direction is the position of
the hole axis!) will be drilled at the point of impact, the hole size being
identical. Thus, the holes are exactly aligned.
Adopt: Drill holes in shapes can be taken over according to the "beam principal"
described in Multiple. In this case, the entries in the dialog are ignored. First,
select all shapes with holes to be transferred and then all shapes to adopt
the hole. Using this function, drill holes from a connecting plate may be
rapidly transferred to a shape.

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing 146 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Drilling the Base Plate to Accommodate Anchor Bolts

5 Select the Settings tab.


6 Set the values shown below.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The following table provides a description of the fields in the dialog.

Hole Type Group Hole Type list: has the following options:

- Normal Drill: The holes are drilled as normal holes which are drilled
Student: Mariano Tomasino

through and which always have the same diameter.

- Countersunk: If set, the holes are drilled as countersunk holes. In the


neighboring input fields, you can specify the countersunk depth and the
opening angle of the hole.

- Step Hole: The holes are drilled as step hole with two different diameters.
The upper diameter is bigger than the lower diameter. In the neighboring
input fields, you can specify the depth and the diameter of the upper hole
section.

Depth/Angle: Depth sets the length of the straight part of the countersunk
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

hole. Angle sets the upper opening angle for the countersunk hole.

Depth/Radius: Depth sets the length of the lower part of the step hole.
Radius sets diameter of the upper part of the step hole.

Hole Type: determines how the drill holes appear in the detailed shop
drawings. You can choose from Hole Representation, Field Drill, Field Bolt, or
Shop Bolt.

Feb-12 147 Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Drilling the Base Plate to Accommodate Anchor Bolts

Offset You can define a relative offset by which the actual hole insertion point is to
be moved away from the selected point. This enables you to offset the
starting point of a hole group against the shape starting point and select the
starting point, or to insert asymmetrically positioned hole groups. These
options are available in the list:
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

- No Offset: The selected point corresponds to the insertion point.

- Rectangular Offset: The offset data in the Distance box are assumed as x/y
values.

- Polar Offset: The offset data in the Distance box are assumed as distance/
pitch values.

Rotation: Specify a rotation of the drill hole field around the insertion point.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

X/Y: If you selected Rectangular as offset, these boxes are activated. You can
enter the two distances in the input fields X-Offset and Y-Offset, shown on
the screen next to X/Y.

Dist/Angle: If you selected Polar as offset, these boxes are activated. You can
enter the distance and the angle in the corresponding input fields here.
Monitor This is the window on the right side of the dialog, in which you can see the
selected drill hole field and determine the insertion point by means of the
small points. The bigger red point shows the current insertion point.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

7 Select the Dimensions tab.


8 Click the Insert Holes into an Object button in the bottom part of the
dialog box.
9 Select the object to be drilled.
10 Select the plate.
The prompt Pick the Insertion point of Drill Pattern displays.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

11 Select the bottom end of the column.


The holes are added to the plate and the dialog returns.
12 Click the check mark.
The function ends.
13 Repeat the same procedure on the columns base plate located at
coordinate C3.

Hint: When drilling objects, be sure to have the UCS in the top plane of the
object to be drilled or pick the insertion point of the drill pattern as the
top surface of the object. The Drill command operates exactly like a
real-world drilling process. You would not drill up from the bottom of
the plate. When drilling a shape such as a wide flange it is only
necessary to pick the shape point of the object as the drill pattern
insertion point as the switches "Drill First Flange", "Drill Next Flange",

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing 148 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Drilling the Base Plate to Accommodate Anchor Bolts

and "Drill Both Flanges" will control the actual UCS plane from which
the drill pattern originates.
Your model should appear as shown below.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 149 Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creation of Dynamic and Static Bracings

Creation of Dynamic and Static Bracings


In this lesson, you will learn how to create Dynamic cross bracing and Static
bracing. You will also be Introduced to ProSteel 3D Construction lines and delve
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

further into the ProSteel 3D SNAPS.

 Exercise 1: Prepare to Create Dynamic Cross Bracing


To begin the cross bracing command you need to prepare the model. This
requires you to set the view of the model to the frame that will contain the
cross bracing and to create construction lines to act as your guide lines for the
bracing.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

1 Zoom to the standard Isometric View.


2 Change the display to the saved Bentley_Y_1 view (Select Choose View).
3 Select the Bentley_Y_1 view from the list.
4 Select Set View to set the model to this view.
5 Select the level to PS_CONST.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

6 Select the AutoCAD line command.


7 Select ProSteel PS ShapePoints.
We will now create the required construction line by drawing an AutoCAD
line.
The prompt Specify the Start Point of Line displays.
8 Select the object center of the upper right-hand beam.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

9 Select ProSteel PS ShapePoints.


10 Select the lower center point of the right-hand column.

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing 150 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creation of Dynamic and Static Bracings

Your model should appear as shown below.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

 Exercise 2: Define and Insert Dynamic Cross Bracing


1 Remain in the Bentley_Y_1 view.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

2 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Connections > Bracing > Bracing
Dynamic.
The prompt Pick System Line of Brace Member <Line>, Point displays.
3 Select the AutoCAD diagonal line between the columns.
The prompt Select First Main Member to connect Brace: displays.
4 Select the left-hand column.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

The prompt Pick Second Main Member to which the bracing connects at
opposite end displays.
5 Select the other column.
The ProSteel Bracing dialog opens.

Feb-12 151 Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creation of Dynamic and Static Bracings

6 Set the parameters as shown below.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Common tab.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Bracing Type Here you select which geometry will be used. Depending on the selection
(Normal, Rod or Pipe) only the corresponding tab (Shape, Rod or Pipe) will
be used to generate the bracing.
Shape Indicate the utilized shapes for the bracing bars. Enter the Shape Catalog into
Information the first selection box, the Shape Type into the second, and the Shape Size
into the third.
Plate Thickness The thickness of the gusset plate
Edge Distance to Determines the minimum distance between Borders or Border objects to the
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

bracing rods
Round Shape Rounds the calculated length of the bracing rods to this value
Length to
Plate Width Sets the maximum width of the gusset plates if the triangular symmetric is
Minimum selected
Offset Selects how far the Gusset Plates overlap the Bracing Rods sideways
Depth accord. Sets the depth of the Bracing according to the UCS system
UCS
Gusset Position Sets the position of the Gusset plates according to the connection plane
Gusset Type Sets the form of the Gusset Plates

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing 152 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creation of Dynamic and Static Bracings

Opening Angle Here you can determine the opening angle of the gusset plate towards the
bracing bar at the shape triangle bent.
Cross Bracing If set, the bracing is designed in the form of a cross stay. Otherwise, only one
bracing bar is added to the selected system line.
Welded Bracing If set, the bracing is welded in its entirety. No borings are added in that case.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Form Group If set, the individual bracing elements are formed into groups.
Symmetrical If set, the bracing is designed in the form of a cross stay and remains
symmetrical if modified with its grips. Otherwise, every bar can be changed
individually.
Dynamic If set, the bracing immediately depicts the modifications made in the dialog.
If you would like to modify many values, you can clear this option for now.

Add Cutting Edge: adds additional boundary edges (lines) for the gusset plate
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

calculation.

Delete Cutting Edge: deletes an additional boundary edge.

Stops the creation of a gusset plate at the end of a bracing bar


Student: Mariano Tomasino

Includes bracing bar which doesn't belong to the bracing in the creation of a
gusset plate

Excludes any bracing bar which doesn't belong to the bracing from the
creation of a gusset plate
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 153 Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creation of Dynamic and Static Bracings
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Shape Bracing
Student: Mariano Tomasino

tab.

Shape Offset Shape Position: the position of the shapes in relation to the gusset plates,
with these options:

- Front: The shapes are located in front of the gusset plate.


- Back: The shapes are located behind the gusset plate.
- Cross: One shape is located in front of the gusset plate and one behind.
- Centered: The shapes are located in the bracing plane.
- Double: One shape each is located in front of and behind the gusset plate
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

(total of 4 shapes for cross stay).


- Replaced: One shape each is located in front of and behind the gusset plate
with one being offset to the left and one to the right (total of four shapes for
cross stay).
- 4-Times: One shape is located on each side (front, rear, left, right), which
makes a total of 8 shapes for cross stay.

Shape Insertion: specifies the insertion position of the shapes:

- Centered: The shapes are inserted along the shape axis.


- COG Line: The shapes are inserted along the COG (Centre of Gravity) line.
- Pitch Line: The shapes are inserted along the pitch line.
- Diagonal: The shapes are inserted along their corner points from Upper
Edge Left up to Lower Edge Right.
- Inverse Diagonal: The shapes are inserted along their corner points from
Lower Edge Left up to Upper Edge Right.

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing 154 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creation of Dynamic and Static Bracings

Shape Offset Hole Position: has these options:


(continued)
- Centered: The holes are drilled on the shape axis.
- COG Line: The drill holes are drilled on COG line.
- Pitch Line: The holes are drilled on the shape pitch line.
- Diagonal: The shapes are inserted along their corner points ”Upper Edge
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Left“ up to “Lower Edge Right“.


- Inverse Diagonal: The shapes are inserted along their corner points from
“Lower Edge Left“ up to “Upper Edge Right“.

Shape Distance: the distance of the shapes for offset or 4-Times bracings.

Rotation Angle: specifies a rotation of the shapes.

Offset: Specifies a projection of the central gusset plate extending past the
shape edges of the bracing bars. Positive values increase the size of the plate
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

whereas negative values decrease it.

Shorten: Here you can specify a value to be used to shorten the shapes after
the bracing has been generated.

Divide All: If set, all shapes of a cross stay are separated at the center gusset
plate.

Mirror Shapes: If set, the shapes are mirrored and then inserted.

Center Hole: At a cross stay and selected shape position 'Crossed', a common
Student: Mariano Tomasino

hole is drilled into the shapes that are crossing each other.

Bind Plates Indicates if there will be binding plates between the bracing rods. Not used
in this exercise.

Hint: The Bracing command may require that you use "Add Cutting Edge" in
order to better define the limits of the bracing and the gusset plates.
This may not be enough to properly define the plate in which case you
can use additional Modify commands to shape the plates as needed.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

This would include such commands as "Extend/Trim to Line". Also of


importance is that Dynamic bracing can be modified after its initial
insertion. It will also dynamically adjust as changes are made to the
adjacent members and the distance between them.
We will now clean up the bracing gusset plates.
7 Select the Common tab of the ProSteel Bracing dialog.
8 Select the Add Cutting Edge function.
9 Select the underside of the beam to reshape and adjust the gusset plates.
10 Select the Add Cutting Edge function again.
11 Select the face of the Endplate to cut the gusset to its face. Do this on the
other side of the beam as well.
12 Click the check mark.

Feb-12 155 Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creation of Dynamic and Static Bracings

13 Add the endplate connection to the beam at coordinate B1 connecting to


the web.
14 Click the check mark.
The dialog closes.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

 Exercise 3: Prepare to Create Static Bracing


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

To begin the bracing command you need to prepare the model. This requires
you to set the view of the model to your frame that will contain the cross
bracing and to create construction lines to act as your guides for the bracing.
1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Isometric
Overview.
2 Change the display to the saved Bentley2_Y_3 view (select Choose View).
3 Select the Bentley2_Y_3 view from the list.
4 Select Set View.

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing 156 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creation of Dynamic and Static Bracings

The model is set to this view:


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Now you will create the construction line for your Static bracing.
5 Invoke the line command.
The prompt Specify first point displays.
6 Select ProSteel PS Shapepoints, then click on the bottom of the left
column's center line.
The start of the line is placed at the base of the column.
The prompt Specify Next Point displays.
7 Select ProSteel PS Shapepoints, then select the snap.
8 Select the CENTER of the crossbeam.
An asterisk will be displayed at the centre of the beam to confirm you are
in the correct location.
The last segment of the line snaps to the center column's base.

Feb-12 157 Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creation of Dynamic and Static Bracings

Your model should appear as shown below.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

 Exercise 4: Define and Insert Static Bracing


Student: Mariano Tomasino

In this exercise you will define and insert Static Bracing components.
1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Connections > Bracing > Bracing
Static.
The ProSteel Static Bracing dialog opens.
2 Set the parameters in the Shapes tab as shown below.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing 158 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creation of Dynamic and Static Bracings

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Shapes tab of the
ProSteel Bracing dialog.

Shape Type Selects the shape type for the bracing rods
Shape Class The shape that will be displayed in the field Shape Window
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Resolution The resolution in which the bracing rods will be inserted


Shape Size The shape size for the bracing rods
UCS Location Determines the position of the gusset plate with respect to the plane of the
bracing:

- The first image: plate front edge.

- The second image: plate center.


Company: Seibo Ingeniería

- The third image: plate rear edge.


Student: Mariano Tomasino

Rod Insertion Determines the position of the rod with respect to the insertion line (system
line). You can insert the rod as Centered, on the Gravity line, or on the Root
line.
Rod Position You can determine the position of the rod with respect to the bracing plane.
You can check the selected position in the Shape Window on the right side of
the Bracing dialog Shape tab.

- Front side: The rod is flush with the front edge of the gusset plate (more
precise: in positive z direction of the UCS).
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

- Back side: The rod is flush with the rear edge of the gusset plate (more
precise: in negative z direction of the UCS).

- Both sides: A rod is positioned on both sides of the gusset plate.

- Centered: The rod axis is in a centered position in the UCS plane.


Rotation You can insert the rod in its normal position or rotated by +90 degrees or -90
degrees. You can check the selected mode in the Shape Window on the right
side of the Bracing dialog Shape tab.
Mirror The shape can be inserted in a normal or mirrored way. You can check the
selected mode in the Shape Window on the right side of the Bracing dialog
Shape tab.

Feb-12 159 Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creation of Dynamic and Static Bracings

Plate Thickness Thickness of gusset plates.


Placement
Options

You can create bracing rods and gusset plates in one operation.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

However, the command is not suitable for the connection of several rods
from different systems. This should be done using a single function.

Inserts only Bracing Rods: You can insert single rods that are
automatically drilled.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Existing shapes are drilled on their ends, according to the


definitions in the dialog field. You must select the shapes for this purpose.

Plate Auto: A gusset plate will be created automatically. Select


Bracing Rods that have already been drilled and then select Boundary Lines
for the Plate Edges. The program will try to find a suitable plate dimension by
keeping the edge distances and the boundary lines. It may be necessary to
pick one point at the planned bracing end. Select the approximate position
of the gusset plate.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Determines the shape of the gusset plate.Select the drilled bracing


rods that are to be connected and pick a point on the planned bracing end.
Select the approximate position of the gusset plate. The edge distances will
be displayed. You then define the shape of the plate by selecting the edge
points of a polyline. You can check the shape being created. The functions
available for creating the polyline are the same as those available for
drawing a polyline using AutoCAD.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

If you have not determined the UCS plane before using the
command, you can do this subsequently: the active UCS plane (and
consequently the plane of the bracing) will be determined by selecting 3
points.

Note: You will return to the dialog after completing any of the placement
options above.

3 Select the Connect tab.

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing 160 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creation of Dynamic and Static Bracings

4 Set the parameters as shown below.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Connect tab of
the ProSteel Bracing dialog.

Bolt Settings Bolt Style: determines the style of bolt.

Dia.: determines the diameter of the bolts.


Student: Mariano Tomasino

Workloose: workloose between the Hole diameter and Bolt diameter.

Number Shape: the number of bolts (drill holes) in shape direction of the rod
on each shape end. The spacing will result from the selected bolt diameter.

Number Cross: sets the number of bolts normal to the bracing rod direction.

Distance: sets the spacing of the holes normal to the bracing rod direction.

Hole Position: determines the position of the holes in the rod. You can insert
the holes as Centered, on the Gravity line, or on the Pitch line.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Options Weld Bracing: If set, the shapes and gusset plates are not drilled. The
dimensions of the gusset plates, however, are determined as if drill holes
exist.

Plate without Edges: If set, the edges of the gusset plate are not beveled but
right-angled.

Create Group: If set, a group is formed for each rod.

With Bolts: If set, the bolts of the bracing rod to be connected are also
allocated to the group.

Feb-12 161 Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creation of Dynamic and Static Bracings

5 Set the parameters of the Distance tab as shown below.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

As you are building a static bracing you will need to build this in sections. First
you will define the bracing angles.
6 Click Inserts only Bracing Rods.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

The prompt Pick System Line of Brace Member <Line>Point displays.


7 Select the AutoCAD line on the left.
The prompt Pick Border Line of Brace Member or Return for End <Line>,
Back, Point displays.
8 Select the left column.
The prompt Pick Border Line of Brace Member or Return for End <Line>,
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Back, Point displays.


9 Select the cross beam at the top.
The prompt Pick Border Line of Brace Member or Return for End <Line>,
Back, Point displays.
10 Right-click.

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing 162 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creation of Dynamic and Static Bracings

The definition phase ends and the Bracing Rod Length dialog opens.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Note: Here you could set the actual length of the rod by changing Wanted
Bracing Length, then clicking the check mark.
11 Repeat this function for the other brace rod.
Now you need to create the gusset plates at each end of the bracing rods. On
the ends that meet the columns you will create two single rod plates. At the
intersection of the two rods with the crossbeam you will create a common
plate for both rods.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

12 If the ProSteel Bracing dialog is not displayed, open it now and select Plate
Auto.
13 Select the lower end of the left bracing rod.
14 Right-click.
The prompt Pick Border Line for Gusset Plate or Return for End <Line>,
Back, Point displays.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

15 Select the inside edge of the column flange.


The prompt Pick Border Line for Gusset Plate or Return for End <Line>,
Back, Point displays.
16 Right-click.
The prompt Pick a Point at the Proposed Brace End displays.
17 Right-click.
The gusset plate is placed and the Structural Bracing dialog is returned.

Note: If selecting the edge of the beam is not recognized by the command,
type P (for point) when asked to select border and define 2 points along
the edge of the beam.
18 Repeat the same process at the lower end of the right bracing rod.
19 Repeat the process one more time at the top end of both bracing rods.

Feb-12 163 Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creation of Dynamic and Static Bracings

20 Select Plate Auto.


The prompt Pick Connection End of Brace Member to be connected or
Return for End: Select objects displays.
21 Select the upper end of BOTH bracing rods where they meet the cross
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

beam.
22 Right-click.
The prompt Pick Border Line for Gusset Plate or Return for End <Line>,
Back, Point displays.
23 Select the lower edge of the flange on the crossbeam.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

24 Right-click.
The gusset plate is placed and the bracing dialog is returned.
25 Click the check mark.
The command closes.
Your model at the location of the bracing should appear as below.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Hint: When adding gusset plates you can use the Select Plate function to
define the plate. You must select the bracing rod near the end to
receive the plate and then pick a point near the gusset plate end. This
will highlight the element with the edges of the plate limits and you
then must build a boundary that defines the shape of the plate.

Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing 164 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Module Review

Module Review
Now that you have completed this module, let’s measure what you have learned.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Questions
1 Can you insert holes in several shapes at the same time using the Drill
command?
2 What are the two types of connections assigned in the Connect tab of the
ProSteel DSTV Baseplate dialog?
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

3 How do you access the dialog where you define and insert Static Bracing
components?
4 How do you access the dialog where you define and insert Dynamic
Bracing components?

Answers
Student: Mariano Tomasino

1 Yes, you insert holes in several shapes at the same time using the Multiple
icon in the ProSteel Drill dialog.
2 The Bolt and Weld connections are assigned in the Connect tab in the
ProSteel DSTV Baseplate dialog.
3 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Connections > Bracing > Bracing
Static. The ProSteel Static Bracing dialog is returned.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

4 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Connections > Bracing > Bracing
Dynamic. The ProSteel Bracing dialog is returned.

Feb-12 165 Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Module Review

166 Creating Base Plates and Cross Bracing


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
Purlin Courses, Web Angles,
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

and Shear Plate Connections


Module Overview
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

In this module, you will learn how to prepare the model for the creation of
purlins. You will also learn how to create and modify purlins.

Module Prerequisites
• Basic Windows knowledge including file navigation etc.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

• Previous experience with 3D CAD system, preferably AutoCAD.


• Completion of previous modules in this course recommended.

Module Objectives
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

After completing this module, you will be able to:


• Prepare the model for the creation of purlins.
• Create two purlins in the upper elevation of our structure.
• Modify the purlins to prepare for detailing the joints.
• Cope shapes and create a template of the cope for future use.
• Add web angles to the coped elements and add web angles where the cope is
called from within the web angle command.

Feb-12 167 Purlin Courses

Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated


Creating the Purlins

Creating the Purlins


This section describes how to create the purlins.

 Exercise 1: Prepare the Model for the Purlin


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

In this exercise, you will learn how to set the UCS to the proper plane for the
creation of the Purlin.
1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Isometric
Overview.
2 Set the UCS using the Object UCS at point, by selecting any part of the
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

upper flange on one of the two W6x25 sloping beams.

Note: Purlins will be created along the "X" axis of the active UCS.

Note: If the UCS display is still incorrect, right-click or press Enter twice. This
will rotate the UCS to the correct orientation.
3 Zoom into the area around the awning.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

 Exercise 2: Create the Purlins (Roof Purlins)


1 From the ProSteel Structural Objects toolbar, select Purlin.
The prompt Pick Lower Left Edge of Purlin Object or ESC for secondary
Beams displays.
2 Select the upper/front side of the top flange in the right edge of the beam
on line 2.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

The prompt Pick Upper Right Edge of Purlin Object displays.


3 Select the upper/back side of the top flange in the left edge of the beam
on line 3.

Purlin Courses 168 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Purlins

See below for the purlin insertion points.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

4 Set the parameters as shown below.


Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Common dialog.

Angle The purlins are rotated around this angle value, so that they are arranged in
a diagonal fashion.
Height Offset This allows you to move the purlin course in positive Z-direction by applying
the indicated value.
Dynamic If set, the modifications of the settings can be monitored immediately on
screen.
Symmetrical If set, the area to be filled (object frame) remains symmetrical.
Draw Diagonal If set, the area to be filled (object frame) is marked with two additional
diagonals.
Cut at Edge If set, the purlins at the edges of the area to be filled are cut flush. Values in
the field Left Projection and Right Projection are then not considered.

Feb-12 169 Purlin Courses


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Purlins

5 Select Dimensions.
6 Set the parameters as shown below.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Dimensions


dialog.

Fixed Grid Grid: If set, you can indicate in the neighboring input field the approximate
distance of the purlins within the area between first and last purlin. The
Student: Mariano Tomasino

program divides the distances regularly according to this specification and


the value is rounded up or down correspondingly.

Pattern effective: displays the actual distances between purlins.


Free Grid If Grid is not set, you can freely define the grid division within the area
between the first and last purlin in the Distance list. You can vary the
number and the distances.

Turn: If set, the distances are inverted.


Offset Bottom The distance from the centerline of the lowest purlin to the outer edge of
the selected area.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Offset Top The distances from the centerline of the topmost purlin to the outer edge of
the selected area.
Offsets Fixed If one of these options is activated, the selected distances are also kept in
the grid; otherwise they are centered.

Purlin Courses 170 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Purlins

7 Select Border lines.


8 Set the parameters as shown below.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Border lines
dialog:

Cut Lines Cutting edges can be added subsequently to permit the creation of non-
rectangular purlin courses as well.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Adds a cutting edge. You are prompted for a borderline to be


selected or to be defined by 2 points.

Cut Width: All purlins intersecting this edge are divided at the edge with the
distance specified here.

Removes a selected cutting edge

Polycut Apart from cutting edges, it is also possible to add sections for light domes or
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

similar items. The procedure is the same as for sections; the only difference
is that you have to select a poly-line here.

Adds another section

Removes a section

Hint: As a rule, after creating a purlin you should delete the yellow object that
inserts in the model. This is used to modify the purlin.

Note: If you leave this object in the model and modify one of the shapes that
are a part of the purlin separate from the other elements and the
purlin, and then you go back later and modify the purlin itself, the one
element previously modified will be replaced by the shape defined in
the purlin. This is true for all ProSteel 3D Structural Objects.

Feb-12 171 Purlin Courses


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Purlins

9 Select Shapes.
10 Set the parameters as shown below.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Shapes dialog.

Shapes headings Select the desired Shape Class, Shape Size, and Shape Type. All shapes are
available for selection.
Position The insertion position of the girders related to the insertion axis
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Rotation The rotation of the shapes around the insertion axis


Resolution Provides options Low, Normal, High

11 Click the check mark.


You will now add the purlin connections.
12 Select Purlin Connection.
13 Select all of the purlins.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

14 Right-click to accept.
15 Select the two beams the purlins connect to.
16 Right-click to accept.
The Purlin Connection dialog is displayed.

Purlin Courses 172 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Purlins

17 Set the parameters as shown below.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

18 Click the check mark.


Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 173 Purlin Courses


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Purlins

 Exercise 3: Create the Purlins (Floor Beams)


In this exercise, you will use the Purlin command to add floor beams to the top
of the Bentley Workframe.
1 From the ProSteel Structural Objects toolbar, select Purlin.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

A prompt appears asking you to specify the lower left edge.


2 Press Esc.
You can now select shapes instead of the 2 corners.
The prompt Select desired shape displays.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

3 Select the beam between columns A1 and A2.


A prompt appears asking you to select another shape.
4 Select the beam between columns B1 and B2.
The Purlin dialog is displayed so you can modify the parameters if
required.
5 Set the parameters as shown below.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

6 Click the check mark.

Purlin Courses 174 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Purlins

 Exercise 4: Create the Cope and Shear Plate Connection


We will now create templates for the cope and shear plate connection. The
first (Cope) will be called within the second (Shear plate connection), which
we will call within the Purlin distribution dialog.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Modify.


Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

2 Select Enables to Cope one Shape on another.


The prompt Select second Shape to Cope displays.
3 Select any of the W12x22 purlin shapes just inserted.
The prompt Select shape on which to cut displays.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

4 Select the W21x44 shape located on Axis A.

Feb-12 175 Purlin Courses


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Purlins

The ProSteel Cope dialog appears.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Structural Cope
dialog.

Layout This allows you to select the shape of the notch. The different variants are
Student: Mariano Tomasino

shown:

On the upper left, the initial situation before notching is shown (the shapes
are still overlapping), and on the upper right you see the Contour.

Pictures below from left to right: Fit Shape Start (the normal notch), Fit
Shape Middle and Fit Shape End.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Corner Layout Edge: The notches at the shape radii are carried out with a beveled edge.

Radial: The notches at the shape radii are carried out with adapted radii.

Radius: In this input field, the determined radius can be modified later.

Access Hole: Holes are drilled in the inner corners of the notch. In the Radius
input field, the radius of the drill holes can be preset.

Purlin Courses 176 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Purlins

Align If From Inner Flange is set, the dimensions refer to the inside of the flanges.
Otherwise, the dimensions for the distance between top and bottom flange
inside refer to the outside of the flanges.

If From Center is set, the dimensions refer to the end of the shape (the exact
position depends on the value in the Web Distance field). Otherwise, the
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

dimensions for the distance between top and bottom flange edge refer to
the outside of the flanges.
Distance Allows you to set distances for the Top Flange Inside, Bottom Flange Inside,
Top Flange Edge, Bottom Flange Edge, Top Flange Outside, Bottom Flange
Outside, the Web Distance and the drill Radius.
Get Flange Allows an unknown shape to be selected. The flange thickness is then
Thickness entered in the input fields for Top and Bottom Flange. If you have entered a
value in the +Distance field, this value will be added. Using this function, a
flange distance can be swiftly determined without knowing the shape. As
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

reference, you should select the setting Outer Edge.


List of Copes In the Data tab, a list of previously defined copes is displayed from a
database. These database files can be created by means of any DBASE editor.
Thus, you can previously define a selection of the most frequent copes. In
the different list fields you can see the basic data of the linkage and load the
required cope by selecting an entry.

You will now save the cope just created as a template so it can be recalled
later.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

5 Select Template at the bottom of the Cope dialog.


6 Create a new folder named Training.
7 Add a new cope to the Training folder.
8 Type Type 1 in the Name field.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

9 Click the check mark.


The cope settings are saved as a template.
10 Press Enter.

Feb-12 177 Purlin Courses


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Purlins

The Cope dialog is returned.


You will now delete the cope from the beam.
11 Select the coped W12x22 beam.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

12 Right-click.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

13 Select PS3D Delete Connection from the context menu.


Student: Mariano Tomasino

The Deletion confirmation dialog box appears.


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

14 Click the check mark to confirm the deletion of the cope.


You will now create a shear plate connection, save it as a template, and then
delete the connection.
15 Using the Shear plate connection, select any of the previously inserted
purlins.
16 Select the supporting W21x44 beam.
The ProSteel Shearplate connection dialog appears.

Purlin Courses 178 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Purlins

17 Set the parameters as shown below.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Shapes tab.

Shape Selection Thickness: the thickness of the web plate

Cut Plate: If set, the plate is cut at the connecting shape in case of beveled
shapes to be connected.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Normal to Cut Plane: If set, the plate is not inserted in shape direction at
beveled connecting shapes but always perpendicular towards the
connecting shape.

Use Polyplates: Polyplates are inserted instead of flats.


Position Position: Specify the web side of the shape to be connected (left or right),
selection which is to be used for attaching the web plate. If Both is selected, a plate is
attached to both sides of the web.

From Edge: If set, the vertical offset is measured from upper edge shape to
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

upper edge web plate.

Lower Edge: If set, the vertical offset refers to the lower edge of shape and
web plate.

Up to First Bolt: If set, the vertical offset does not refer to the edges of the
web plate but to the center of the first drill hole.

Gap: Enter the distance to be adhered to from the outer edge of the support
shape to the outer edge of the shape to be connected.

Vertical Offset: Enter the distance of the offset for the web plate from the
axis of the shape to be connected towards top or to the right (depending on
position). Negative values affect an opposite offset.

18 Select the Distance tab.

Feb-12 179 Purlin Courses


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Purlins

19 Set the parameters as shown below.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Distance tab.

Distribution Number: number of drill holes in shape direction


Shape Direction
Slot Length: length of the slot

End Offset inside: distance of the last center of a drill hole to the end of the
web plate on the side of the connecting shape
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Connection Edge: distance of the last drill hole to the end of the connecting
shape on the side of the support shape

Distance Between: distance between two drill holes in the direction of the
connecting shape
Distribution Number: number of drill holes in transversal shape direction
Cross Direction
Edge Distance: distance of the drill holes to the outer edge of the web plate

Distance Between: distances between two drill holes in the transversal


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

direction of the connecting shape

20 Select the Connect tab.


21 Set the parameters as shown below.

Purlin Courses 180 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Purlins

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Connect tab.

Bolt Settings Bolt Style: Select the bolt style (e.g. A325 FIELD) for the connection in the
list.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Dia.: Specify the bolt diameter for the connection.

Workloose: Enter the desired clearance of the bolted connection, usually 1/


16".

Bolt Style Add/Edit: edit the bolt style or create a new one.
Weld Settings Weld Style: Specifies the kind of weld seam
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Weld Style Add/Edit: edit the weld style or create a new one.

Weld Connect/Support Shape Side: Specify which seams are to be created in


the model using the option Weld Flange Side or Weld Web Side. The
Thickness of the different weld seams is specified in the corresponding input
fields.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 181 Purlin Courses


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Purlins

22 Select the Cope tab.


23 Set the parameters as shown below.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Cope tab.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Cope If set, you can either select an already stored notch variant or enter the data
directly using the icon.
Cope Specify how the connecting shape has to be notched. You can select Top
Connection double sided or Bottom double sided.
Shape
Gap Define the necessary gap distance for the notch in the Gap field.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Purlin Courses 182 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Purlins

24 Select the Group tab.


25 Set the parameters as shown below.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Group tab.

Create Group If set, at insertion of the shear plate connection, the inserted parts are
Student: Mariano Tomasino

automatically assigned to a construction group which is created.


With Bolts/ If set, the bolts and weld seams are also added to that group.
Weldment
Create a Group If set, an individual construction group is created for each inserted shear
of each Plate plate.

Note: Remember to go through the Assignment tab to assign all the proper
information to the plate properties.
26 Click the check mark.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

 Exercise 5: Add the Shear Plate Template Automatically to All the Purlins
In this exercise, you will create a template as you did for the Cope and delete
the connection in the same way.
1 Select the yellow "X" (parametric line) that appeared on the purlins T.O.S.
you created on top of the Bentley Workframe.
A context menu appears.
2 Right-click on PS3D Properties.
3 Select the Connections page.

Feb-12 183 Purlin Courses


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Purlins

4 Set the parameters as shown below.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The floor beams are inserted to the spacing entered and the shear plate
connections are automatically added according to the template selected,
which includes the cope template.

 Exercise 6: Divide the Purlins in Half with a New Support Beam


Student: Mariano Tomasino

In this exercise, you will use the Divide option from the Manipulate submenu
to separate the purlins into multiple pieces and ready the intersections for
joint detailing.
1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Isometric
Overview.
You will now insert a W8X18 beam at the mid-point of the W21X44 beams
between columns A1 and B1, and A2 and B2.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

2 Select ProSteel Shapes.


3 Set to W8X18 shape.
4 Insert the shape using the 2 points method.
5 Select the mid-point of the beam between A1 and B1.
6 Select the mid-point of the beam between columns A2 and B2.
7 Click OK.
8 Select Choose View.
The Choose View dialog opens.
9 Select the Bentley_TOP view.
10 Select Set View.
The UCS and the view are set to the upper frame of the structure.

Purlin Courses 184 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Purlins

11 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Manipulate > Divide.


The prompt Select the Shapes to be Divided displays.
12 Select all W12x22 beams added in the second purlin exercise.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

13 Right-click.
The selections are entered, and the prompt Pick Dividing Point <Point>,
Line appears.

Note: To be able to select multiple shapes for modification, the Multiple


Object Selection option for the type of manipulation you are performing
must be enabled in the Options tab of the Element Modification dialog
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

(from the ProStructures 3D menu, select Manipulate > Dialog).


14 Click on the end of the W8X18 beam on the upper frame.
The W12x22 shapes are divided where they cross the W8X18 shape.
15 Click the check mark.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 185 Purlin Courses


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Adding Web Angle Connections

Adding Web Angle Connections


 Exercise 1: Add the Web Angle Connection to the W8X18 Beams
In this exercise, you will add web angles where the cope is called from within
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

the web angle command.


You will connect W8X18 beams to the W21X44 beams on Axis 1 and 2, and
then connect the W12X22 beams you divided to the W8X18 beam between
Axis A and B.
1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Isometric
Overview.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

2 Window in on the area where the W8X18 beam intersects the upper
W21X44 beam.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

3 Select Webangle connection.


The prompt Select Shape to connect displays.
4 Select the W8X18 beam.
The prompt Select support Shape displays.
5 Select the W21X44 beam on Axis 2.
The ProSteel Web Angle Connection dialog appears.

Note: If you press Enter (or right-click) when prompted to select the support
shape, you will be able to add a web angle to the selected beam
without any supporting beam.

Purlin Courses 186 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Adding Web Angle Connections

6 Set the parameters as shown below.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Shapes tab.

Shape Selection Shape Class: the angle shape of the selected connection. Only shapes that
are equal-sided angles and unequal-sided angles can be selected.

Use flat: If set, the web angle will be made from bent plate steel instead of
angle steel.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Enter required lengths in these fields: Long Leg, Short Leg, Thickness, and
Bent Radius. The program determines the actual length of the steel plate.
Position Position: the side of the shape (Left or Right) to be connected to the web
selection angle. If both sides are selected, a web angle is created at each side of the
web.

Turn Angles: If set, the long and short sides of the web angle are exchanged
so that the long side is situated at the connecting shape.

Gap: the distance between the end of the connecting shape and the
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

supporting shape

Side Offset: the distance between the web of the connected shape and the
web angles (normally 0 or a slight clearance).

Vertical Offset: the distance the web angle is shifted from the axis of the
shape to be connected, upwards or to the right (depending on the position).
A negative entry will cause shifting in the opposite direction.

Selecting one of the following options permits you to make additional


specifications referring to the dimension:

From Edge: if set, the vertical offset is measured from the upper edge of the
shape up to the upper edge of the web angle.

Lower Edge: if set, the vertical offset refers to the lower edge of shape and
web angle instead of to the upper edge.

Up to First Bolt: If set, the vertical offset refers to the centre of the first bolt
instead of to the edges of the web angle.

7 Select the Distance tab.

Feb-12 187 Purlin Courses


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Adding Web Angle Connections

8 Set the parameters as shown below.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Distance tab.

Number Shape Shape: the number of drill holes in both sides of the web angle cross-wise to
(all fields) the shape to be connected (in the original position parallel to the connecting
shape).

Connecting: the number of drill holes in the long side of the web angle (in
the original position parallel to the shape to be connected).
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Supporting: the number of drill holes in the short side of the web angle (in
the original position cross-wise to the connecting shape).
Distance Slot Length: the drill holes are carried out as slotted holes with the indicated
(all fields) slot length.

Edge/Inner Distances: the outer edge of the angle shape for each direction.

Distance Between: the distance between two holes for each direction.

Absolute Inner Distance: If set, the inner distance of the holes in the short
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

leg means the distance between the holes.

Purlin Courses 188 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Adding Web Angle Connections

9 Select the Connect tab.


10 Set the parameters as shown below.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Connect tab.

Bolt Style Select the bolt style (e.g. A325 SHOP) for the connection in the list.
Dm Specify the bolt diameter for the connection.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Workloose Enter the desired clearance for the bolt connection, usually 1/16".

Bolt Style Add/Edit: edit the bolt style or create a new one.

Diagonal Offset A shift of the bolt axes between support and connecting bolts
Gap Spacing Distance between the web of the supporting shape and the web angle

11 Select the Welding tab.


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

12 Set the parameters as shown below.

Feb-12 189 Purlin Courses


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Adding Web Angle Connections

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Welding tab.

Weld Style Specify the kind of weld seam.


Weld Connect You can specify which seams have to be created in the model here.
Shape Side or
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Weld Support The Thickness of the different weld seams is specified in the corresponding
Shape Side input fields.

Weld Style Add/Edit: edit the weld style or create a new one.

13 Select the Cope tab.


14 Set the parameters as shown below.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Cope tab.

Cope Cope check box: if set, allows you to select an already stored cope template
or enter the cope data directly.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Cope Connection Shape: defines how the connecting shape has to be coped.

Gap: Specify the necessary gap distance for the cope.

Create or modify the cope template. To activate, clear Cope.

Safety Copes Specify whether a safety cope has to be carried out. In addition, the inserted
angle can be shortened.

15 Click the check mark.


16 Repeat for the other end of the W8x18.

Note: The connection should appear with all the same settings as the previous
connection, so there is no need to go through all of the dialog's pages.

Purlin Courses 190 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Adding Web Angle Connections

17 Repeat the connection on all the purlins (W12x22) where you divided
them at the W8x18 intersection using the same settings, except for the
Distance page, as follows:
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The structure should now look like this:


Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 191 Purlin Courses


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Module Review

Module Review

Questions
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

1 What functions are available in the Border lines page in the ProSteel Purlin
dialog?
2 What functions are available in the Shapes page in the ProSteel Purlin
dialog?
3 What tabs are available in the ProSteel Shear Plate Connection dialog?
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

4 What information is assignment in the Connect tab of the ProSteel Shear


Plate Connection dialog?

Answers
1 In the Border lines page of the ProSteel Purlin dialog, you can add or
remove a cutting edge or a section.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

2 In the Shapes page of the ProSteel Purlin dialog, you select the 1) shape
class, size, and type 2) the insertion position of the girders related to the
insertion axis 3) the rotation of the shapes around the insertion axis, and
4) the resolution.
3 ProSteel Shear Plate Connection dialog contains the following tabs:
Shapes, Distance, Connnect, Cope, Data, Group, and Assignment.
4 The Connect tab of the ProSteel Shear Plate Connection dialog assigns
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

parameters concerning connecting bolts, such as bolt style and diameter.

Purlin Courses 192 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Structural Elements
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Module Overview
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

In addition to all of the described construction tools, ProSteel enables the


generation of repeatedly occurring standard construction in parameterized form -
the so-called structural objects. These are pre-designed small construction
sections, such as handrails, stairs, or hangar frames, which you can modify to your
own requirements.

The structural objects are generated by the program according to pre-specified,


adjustable construction methods; if these correspond with your expectations you
Student: Mariano Tomasino

can generate an entire handrail. Although this is a new AutoCAD element, you can
later access each and every individual building component and adapt and modify
it individually using the ProSteel 3D standard functions.

Note: When working with structural objects, you should remember that these
individual changes are lost if you subsequently modify the structural
object using the dialog or the grips. The reason for this is that, in the
case of structural objects, only the dialog parameters are saved, not
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

your subsequent dialog-independent modifications.

Module Prerequisites
• Basic Windows knowledge including file navigation etc.
• Previous experience with 3D CAD system, preferably AutoCAD.
• Completion of previous modules in this course recommended.

Feb-12 193 Structural Elements

Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated


Module Objectives

Module Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Use the handrail functionality.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

• Create stairs.
• Use the ladder.
• Create custom manual views.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Structural Elements 194 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Handrail

Creating the Handrail


In this lesson, you will learn how to prepare the model for creation of a handrail,
create the handrail, and attach the handrail to your structure.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

 Exercise 1: Prepare the Model for the Handrail


In this exercise, you will learn how to set the UCS to the proper plane for the
creation of the handrail and draw the polyline needed to construct the
handrail.
1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Isometric
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Overview.
2 Start the AutoCAD Polyline command and place a polyline around the
upper area of frame BENTLEY using the following coordinates:
from X= –0'-1 3/4" Y= 11'-3 1/2" Z= 10'-0"
to X= –0'-1 3/4" Y= –0'-1 3/4"
to X= 12'-1 3/4" Y= –0'-1 3/4"
Student: Mariano Tomasino

to X= 12'-1 3/4" Y= 7'-8 1/2"

 Exercise 2: Create the Handrail


1 Select Handrail on the Structural Objects toolbar.
The prompt Select the polyline displays.
2 Select the polyline you created in the previous exercise.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

The ProSteel Handrail dialog displays.


3 Set the parameters in the Common tab as shown below.

Feb-12 195 Structural Elements


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Handrail

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Common tab.

Layout Determines whether the handrail has to be carried out as parametrical


construction or with user-defined blocks. These options are available:
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Parametric: All further settings are in the section "Dimensions".

Blocks: All further settings are in the section "Blocks".


Dynamic If set, the modified settings can be verfied directly and immediately on
screen. A modification of the polyline has immediate effects, too.
Draw Diagonal If set, an auxiliary diagonal of the actual structural object is drawn in the
different segments to facilitate its selection.
No Auto Update If set, you can manually release the update of the handrail by pressing a
button.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Group Status Determines whether another parent group has to be formed out of all
handrail components (including their inner group structure). You can choose
between No Group, Component Part Group and Assembly.
Group Name Indicates the name of the parent group. Wildcards for the overall
dimensions ($(L), $(W), $(H)) are permitted.

4 Select the Dimensions tab.


5 Set the parameters in the Dimensions tab as shown below.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Dimensions tab.

Heights (all) The distance between the drawn polyline and the insertion line of the rails
(can be center, top or bottom of rail)
Radii (all) Radii of the railings and kick-plate at the corners of the handrail. If a radius is
specified, the corresponding shape bends are applied; otherwise a mitered
joint is cut.
Connect. Sphere Indicates the thickening radius at the gusset points between posts and e. g.
Dia. knee-high guardrails.

Structural Elements 196 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Handrail

6 Select the Post Distribution tab.


7 Set the parameters in the Post Distribution tab as shown below.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Post distribution
tab.

Post Distribution Specifies the approximate spacing of the rail posts within the individual
polyline segments.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Normal: The segment is regularly divided and the pre-determined post


distance is adapted.

Adapt First: The post distance of the default setting is kept and only the first
part of the segment is corrected.

Adapt Last: The post distance of the default setting is kept and only the last
part of the segment is corrected.

Adapt First/Last: The post distance of the default setting is kept and only the
first and the last part of the segment are corrected equally.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Post Distance The distance of the rail posts within the individual polyline segments.
Depending on the setting, the program uses this information to space out
the newel posts in regular intervals and rounds the value up or down as
needed.
Maximum If set, the values of the determined post distances are never rounded up. The
post distance is regarded as the maximum value. If necessary, additional
posts are inserted.
Edge Offset The spacing of the corner posts between two handrail segments starting
with the intersection of the polyline segments
Min. segment The minimum length of a handrail segment from which posts are created.
Length Thus you avoid e. g. the creation of posts at the inner edge of intermediate
landings at staircases with changing direction.
Min. seg. 2 posts The minimum length of a handrail segment from which two posts are
created at the beginning and at the end. If the actual length is smaller (but
larger than the Minimum Segment Length), only one post will be created in
the middle of the segment.

Feb-12 197 Structural Elements


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Handrail

8 Select the Offset tab.


9 Set the parameters in the Offsets tab as shown below.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Offsets tab.

Posts inside If set, the end posts are moved to the inside. The post distances in the first
and last segment are decreased by the value specified for the offset of the
railing head.
All Equal If set, the default settings for railing head offset are used for all shapes.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Start Offset Projection of the corresponding shape starting from the middle of the first
rail post towards the outside.
End Offset Projection of the corresponding shape starting from the middle of the last
rail post towards the outside.
All input fields Individually determine start and end offset of the different shapes if All Equal
is not set.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Structural Elements 198 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Handrail

10 Select the End form tab.


11 Set the parameters in the End form tab as shown below.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The following table provides a description of the fields in the End form tab.

Upper Selection Specifies the form of the handrail's end.


Lists (Transitions
without End Align As Is: No detailing takes place.
Offset)
to Outer Edge: The handrail is extended up to the outer edge of the post.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Anglecut: The handrail and the end post are cut to build a miter joint.

Insert Bend: The handrail and the end post are combined by means of a bent
part. Enter the radius in the Radius input field.

The Radius field can be entered as an absolute value or as a multiplier of the


diameter using the * in front of the multiplier value. E.g. *2 - means twice
the diameter
Lower Selection Specifies the form of the handrail's end. Additional shape parts are added in
Lists (Transitions the handrail outside the end post.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

with End Offset)


Align As Is: No detailing takes place.

Anglecut: The additional shape parts in the rail are cut to build a miter joint.
Insert Bend: The additional shape parts in the handrail are combined by
means of a bent part. Enter the radius in the Radius input field.

The Radius field can be entered as an absolute value or as a multiplier of the


diameter using the "*" in front of the value. E.g. *2 - means twice the
diameter.
Link with/Type Specify up to which height the handrail has to be extended to the bottom.
When you select knee-high guardrail above, center or below (if they exist),
an additional perpendicular part will be added.
Close If set, the handrail will be extended up to the end support after detailing.

12 Select the Shapes tab.

Feb-12 199 Structural Elements


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Handrail

13 Set the parameters in the Shapes tab as shown below.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Structural Elements 200 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Handrail
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Shapes tab.

Shape Class The settings are valid for the selected shape group.
(upper)
Shape Class The class or catalogue of the selected shape
(lower)
Shape Size The size of the selected shape
Shape Type The type of the selected shape
Insertion Plane The insertion plane of the shape. You can choose between Center, Lower
Edge and Upper Edge.
Angle The rotation around the insertion axis.
Mirror The shape is mirrored before insertion.

The settings of another component part group can be copied into the
current selection.

Feb-12 201 Structural Elements


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Handrail

14 Select the Kick Plate tab.


15 Set the parameters in the Kick Plate tab as shown below.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Kick Plate tab.

Other Side If set, the baseboard will be inserted at the other side of the railing posts.
Side Offset Specifies the distance of outer edge of railing post and inner edge of
baseboard. This permits you to keep some space for individual fastenings or
grouts.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Height Offset The distance between the drawn polyline and the lower edge of baseboard.
Negative values will move the baseboard towards the bottom.

16 Select the Connection tab.


17 Set the parameters in the Connection tab as shown below.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Connection tab.

Layout Selects how the handrail is fastened. Depending on selection, you have
different possibilities which may also influence other dialog tabs.
Outside If set, lateral connecting plates will be welded on the other side of the posts.
This option is only available for lateral connections.
For Diagonals If set, you can specify other dimensions for diagonal handrail segments e.g.
at a stringer. This option is only available for vertical connections.

Structural Elements 202 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Handrail

Plate Layout Indicates how the lateral connection plates have to be executed. This option
is only available for lateral connections.

Complete Plate: All plates are created with the complete dimensions.

Cut Outside: The plates at the two outside posts are cut at the outside to be
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

flush with the support.

Only Right Side: All plates are cut on the left side to be flush with the
supports.

Only Left Side: All plates are cut on the right side to be flush with the
supports.
Projection Side For plates which are cut to be flush (projection= 0) you can indicate a
projection beyond the edges of the supports here and thus modify the plate
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

size. Negative values will reduce the size of projection towards the inside.
This option is only available for lateral connections.
Plate Width The width of the connecting plates
Plate Length The length (height) of the connecting plates
Plate Thickness The thickness of the connecting plates
Hole Dia. The diameter of fastening holes
w (horizontal) The axis distance of fastening holes
w (vertical) The vertical distance of fastening holes, if you selected lateral connecting
plates. You can thus create a plate with four holes. If you enter the value 0,
Student: Mariano Tomasino

only two holes are created.


Galv. HoleDm Enter the diameter of an additional galv. outlet hole (center position towards
post axis) This option is only available for Vertical connections.
Side Offset If you enter a value bigger than 0, a perpendicular connecting plate will be
inserted between plate and post. If you indicated an Inlet Radius in addition,
the additional plate will be omitted and the connection will be made as bent
post. This option is only available for lateral connections.
Start Radius If you enter a value bigger than 0, the connection will be made as bent post
with perpendicularly welded plate. This option is only available for lateral
connections.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

As Polyplate If set, a polyplate will be created instead of a flat steel.


Rotate 90 deg. If set, base plates will be rotated by 90°. This option is only available for
Vertical connections.

18 Create a template with these settings to use later under the stair
command.

Feb-12 203 Structural Elements


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Stairs

Creating the Stairs


 Exercise 1: Create the Stair and Modify its Settings
1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Isometric
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Overview.
2 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Structural Objects > Stairs.
The prompt Pick Start point of the Stairs displays.
3 Type in the absolute coordinates (27'-3¼",9'-4",0'-0").
The prompt Pick direction of the stairs displays.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

4 Select a point to the left of the insertion point (in the direction of negative
"X" Axis).
The Dimensions page of the ProSteel Stair dialog displays.
5 Set the parameters as shown below.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Descriptions of the fields in the Dimensions page of the ProSteel Stair dialog
are provided in the table below.

Width The width of the staircase across outer steel edge


Length Entire length of the stair construction
Height The height of the staircase from starting point to stair head including
gridiron
Riser The desired rise of the staircase steps
Riser Count The resulting number of steps
Angle The resulting gradient of the staircase
Going The resulting exact tread depth of the steps. This value can, however, also be
determined before and the construction will be calculated anew according
to this value.
Actual Rise The resulting exact rise of the steps. This value can, however, also be
determined before and the construction will be calculated anew according
to this value.
Upper insert If set, the insertion point is situated on the upper side of the staircase
point instead of the bottom side (and it is extended towards the bottom).

Structural Elements 204 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Stairs

Dynamic If set, you can monitor the settings immediately on screen.


Template Allows you to name and save the settings for later use.

6 Select the Basis page.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

7 Set the parameters as shown below.


Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Descriptions of the fields in the Basis page of the ProSteel Stair dialog are
provided in the table below.

Lower Landing Length of the lower stair head. To create the stair head, you have to check
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Length the input field in front of it. Otherwise, the staircase cheeks are cut at the
basic plane and the stair head is omitted.
US_Definition If set, the stair head lengths are defined according to US-standards.
Upper Landing Length of the upper stair base.
Stair foot length Enter the length of the Staircase foot.
Vertical section Allows you to enter a vertical cut from the front edge of the staircase cheek.
This field is only available when you didn't specify a length of staircase foot
(i.e. the staircase cheek is directly running into the floor level.)
Ground distance Allows you to enter a gap between staircase foot and floor level to have
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

room e.g. for an additional construction or for foundations. This field is only
available when you didn't specify a length of staircase foot (i.e. the staircase
cheek is directly running into the floor level.)
Web Grating Height of the attached gridirons.
Side Offset The projection of the attached gridirons beyond the outer edge of the
staircase construction. Negative values decrease the dimension of gridirons.

Feb-12 205 Structural Elements


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Stairs

8 Select the Platforms page.


9 Set the parameters as shown below.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Descriptions of the fields in the Platforms page of the ProSteel Stair dialog are
provided in the table below.

No. of platforms Enter the number of floors (intermediate stair heads).


Inner Distance Enter the measure between two staircases (including cheek shapes) if the
intermediate stair heads are stair heads for change over.
Platform No. Select the floor you want to process.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Length Length of the current platform


Height Height of the current platform
Lower Landing Length of the lower landing of the current platform
Length
Upper Landing Length of the upper landing of the current platform
Length
Angle to prev. If you enter an angle here, you can create the bent running of the staircase
Platform or stair heads for change over (180°). Negative values create an opposite
sense of rotation.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Structural Elements 206 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Stairs

10 Select the Shapes page.


11 Set the parameters as shown below.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Descriptions of the fields in the Shapes page of the ProSteel Stair dialog are
provided in the table below.

Shape Class/ Allows you to select the shapes for the stair and stair header cheeks
Size/ Type/
Resolution
Student: Mariano Tomasino

12 Select the Bolts page.


13 Set the parameters as shown below.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Descriptions of the fields in the Bolts page of the ProSteel Stair dialog are
provided in the table below.

Drill Stringer If set, the stair cheeks are drilled to permit bolting the steps or the handrail.
Bolt Handrail to If set, the cheeks and the handrail are bolted - if a handrail exists. Select the
Stringer required bolt type in the selection list.
Bolt Tread to If set the steps and cheeks are bolted. Select the required bolt type in the
Stringer selection list.

Feb-12 207 Structural Elements


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Stairs

14 Select the Treads page.


15 Set the parameters as shown below.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Descriptions of the fields in the Treads page of the ProSteel Stair dialog are
provided in the table below.

Create Treads If set, the stair steps are generated.


Step Type Provides three options: Standard Steps, Treads Built from Shapes and
Blocksteps.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Treads Built from Shapes: If set, the steps are generated from shapes instead
of as DIN-steps. In the selection lists you can select the required shape as
usual. All shapes are available for selection.
Increment The depth of the staircase steps
b, c, d Distances for the mounting holes of the staircase steps:

b: distance of the holes from the upper edge of the steps


c: height of the fastening of staircase steps
d: hole spacing of both mounting holes
Hole Spacing The spacing of the steps' mounting holes
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Hole Dia. The hole diameter of the steps' mounting holes


Slot Length The distance of the axes of the rear oblong step hole
Offset The offset of the staircase steps from the front edge of the staircase to the
back. Negative values move the steps to the front.

Note: The type of step that is selected from the Step Type list controls which
set of parameters are displayed in the Treads tab. More information on
the parameters for the different step types can be accessed from the
ProSteel 3D help
16 Select the Handrail page.

Structural Elements 208 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Stairs

17 Set the parameters as shown below.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Descriptions of the fields in Handrail page of the ProSteel Stair dialog are provided
in the table below.

Create Handrails If set, a handrail is added to the staircase.


Handrail Allows you to specify the bolting of handrail and staircase cheek.
Connection
Automatic: The program tries to determine the most suitable fastening.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Vertical: The handrail is always bolted on the staircase cheek from above,
independently of the settings in the used handrail template.

By Side: The handrail is always bolted laterally on the staircase cheek,


independently of the settings in the used handrail template.

Individual: The settings in the handrail template are used.


Start Offset Allows you to enter an offset value that moves the start of the handrail from
the front edge of the staircase to the back. Negative values move the
handrail to the front. For staircases without basic stair head, you can move
the start of the handrail to a position where a bolt mounting is possible.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

End Offset As in Start Offset, enter an offset value here for the end of the handrail.
Side Offset Allows you to enter an offset value that moves the handrail from the outer
edge of the staircase to the outside. This permits you to mount the handrail
outside the staircase on other shapes or on the wall.
Height Offset Allows you to enter an offset value that moves the handrail from the upper
edge of the staircase cheek to the top. This permits you to attach a grout or
an individual fastening.
Side Offset If you enter a value bigger than 0 in this input field, a vertical connecting
plate is inserted between plate and staircase cheek in case of lateral
mounting.
Handrail Select the template to be used for the handrail in the selection list. This
Template template describes the exact structure. The handrail templates are created
by means of the Handrail structural element and the template function.
Select this to preset the handrail structure (shapes, distances, etc.) or edit
the used handrail templates. Another dialog opens which is identical with
the Handrail structure object. You can refer to this dialog for further
information.

Feb-12 209 Structural Elements


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating the Stairs

18 Select the WorkFrame tab.

Hint: A separate WorkFrame can be created showing a direct overview on the


staircase to allow for better working at the staircase within the bounds
of a bigger construction. By clicking the fields Front View, Lateral View
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Left, Lateral View Right or Top View, you can create the corresponding
working frame. You can enter the general name of the workframe in the
Group Name field. If you enter a value in the Edge Distance field, the
size of the different frames is decreased. Thus, you can better select
frames that are lying next to each other.
19 Click the check mark.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The ProSteel Stair dialog closes.


20 Save your model.
The model should look like the figure below.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Structural Elements 210 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Ladder and Manual Views

Ladder and Manual Views


 Exercise 1: Create a Ladder
In this exercise, you will learn how to create the Ladder element and modify
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

its settings.
1 Select Ladders from the ProSteel 3D Structural Objects toolbar.
The prompt Pick Left Insertion Point of Ladder displays.
2 Select the intersection of Axis A and Axis 2 at elevation 10'-0".
The prompt Pick right insert point of ladder displays.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

3 Select the intersection of Axis B and Axis 2 at elevation 10'-0".


The prompt Pick a Top Point (+ ALT Key) displays.
4 Hold down the Alt key and select a point toward the top right-hand corner
of the drawing area.
The Dimensions page of the ProSteel Ladder dialog displays.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

5 Set the parameters as shown below.


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Descriptions of the fields in the Dimensions page of the ProSteel Ladder dialog
are provided in the table below.

Width The width of the ladder as clear dimension between the uprights
Height The height of the ladder without possible projection as help for climbing out
Riser The desired distance between the rungs. The program divides the distances
between first and last rung regularly according to this specification and the
value is rounded up or down correspondingly.
Actual riser The actual resulting distance between the rungs
Distance to Floor The distance between the upper edge of the first rung and the ground area
of the ladder
Top Distance The distance between the upper edge of the last rung and the climbing out
area of the ladder

Feb-12 211 Structural Elements


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Ladder and Manual Views

Offset The height of the help for climbing out related to the climbing out surface of
the ladder (axis measure)
Stringer The depth of the help for climbing out (axis measure)
Sharp Bend The front jump-in of the help for climbing out (axis measure), if it has to be
created with a bend
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Dynamic If set, you can monitor the settings immediately on screen.


Draw Diagonal If set, a diagonal of the actual structural element is drawn in the ladder to
support an easier selection.
Fit Ladder Rung If set, the Rungs are displayed even if there is no Shape given.

6 Select the Shapes page.


7 Set the parameters as shown below.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Descriptions of the fields in the Shapes page of the ProSteel Ladder dialog are
provided in the table below.

Selection Lists Select the shapes of the ladder uprights and rungs as usual. All shapes are
available for selection.
0°,90°,180°,270° You can rotate the profiles around their insertion axis here by checking the
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

required angle.
Mirror If set, the profile will be mirrored before insertion.

8 Select the Wall Mounting page.


9 Set the parameters as shown below.

Structural Elements 212 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Ladder and Manual Views

Descriptions of the fields in the Wall Mounting tab of the ProSteel Ladder
dialog are provided in the table below.

0°,90°,180°,270° You can rotate the wall profile around its insertion axis here by checking the
required angle.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Mirror If set, the wall profile will be mirrored before insertion.


Position Select the insertion position of the wall profile:

Inner Edge: If set, the wall shape is inserted at the inner edge of the upright
and shows to the inside.

Centrally: If set, the wall shape is inserted in axis position on the height of
upright axis.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Outer Edge: If set, the wall shape is inserted at the outer edge of the upright
and shows to the outside.
Wall Distance The distance between upright axes and wall surface where the ladder has to
be mounted
Distance to Floor The distance between the axis of the first wall profile and the ground area of
the ladder
Distance The desired distance of the wall profiles. The program divides the distances
between the first and last wall profile regularly according to this
specification and the values are rounded up or down correspondingly.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Top Distance The distance between the axis of the last wall profile and the climbing out
area of the ladder

Template: allows you to name and save the settings for later use.

Crone: You can transmit the data of an existing connection to the new
connection by selecting the existing web angle connection.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

10 Select the Safety Cage page.


11 Set the parameters as shown below.

Feb-12 213 Structural Elements


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Ladder and Manual Views

Descriptions of the fields in the Safety Cage tab of the ProSteel Ladder dialog
are provided in the table below.

0°,90°,180°,270° You can rotate the profile around its insertion axis here by checking the
required angle.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Mirror If set, the wall profile will be mirrored before insertion.


Position Select the insertion position where the stiffening ring is connected with the
upright.

Inner Edge: If set, the connection between stiffening ring and upright is
inserted at the inner edge of the upright and shows to the inside.

Centered: If set, the connection between stiffening ring and upright is


inserted in axis position on the height of upright axis.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Outer Edge: If set, the connection between stiffening ring and upright is
inserted at the outer edge of the upright and shows to the outside.
Radius Specifies the radius of cage stiffeners
Number of Specifies how many longitudinal rungs the cage has to have. The bars will be
Rungs divided regularly on the resulting semicircle.
Lower Radius Sets the Inner radius of the safety cage at the lower edge
Lower Distance Sets the distance of the lower to the next connection of the safety cage
Distance The desired distance of the stiffeners (rings) of the safety cage. The program
Student: Mariano Tomasino

divides the distances between the first and last ring regularly according to
this specification and the values are rounded up or down correspondingly.

12 Click the check mark.


The ladder is inserted.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Structural Elements 214 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Manual View

Creating a Manual View


 Exercise 1: Create a Custom Frame (View)
In this exercise you will learn how to create a custom view to be used by the
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Choose View command and for later use in the detailing.


1 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Object View at
Point.
The prompt Select element to set View to, or RETURN to align the View is
displayed.
2 Select one of the Purlins support beams on either side at its top of steel
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

(top of top flange) on the awning.


The prompt Pick desired Axis is displayed.
3 Select the Magenta axis pointing upwards away from the model.
Now that you have the desired plane depicted in our model, you can begin the
process of creating the custom view.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

4 Select Choose View.


The Choose View dialog opens.
5 Select Create New Workframe.
6 Name the new view Awning_P.
7 Click the check mark.
The prompt Select lower left edge of desired window displays.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

8 Use the snap and select the bottom left hand corner of the purlin.
The prompt Select upper right edge of desired window displays.
9 Select a point to the right and above the first point to include all of the
purlins and the first part of the mounting beams, similar to the figure
below.
The view is created and the Choose View dialog returns.
10 Select Cancel.

Feb-12 215 Structural Elements


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Creating a Manual View

The process ends.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

11 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select Zoom/Views > Isometric


Overview.
The isometric overview is returned.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

You are now ready to test.


12 Select Zoom/Views > Choose View.
13 Select your newly created view Awning_P.
14 Select Set View, or double-click on the view.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Structural Elements 216 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Module Review

Module Review

Questions
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

1 What are structural elements?


2 What are the dimensions defined in the Dimensions page of the ProSteel
Stair dialog?
3 After you enter the dimensions for the staircase in the Dimensions page of
the ProSteel Stair dialog, what is automatically generated?
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

4 What are pages are used in the ProSteel Ladder dialog?

Answers
1 Structural elements are pre-designed small construction sections, such as
handrails, stairs, or hangar frames, which you can modify to your own
requirements. They are accessed via the Structural Objects toolbar.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

2 In the Dimensions page of the ProSteel Stair dialog, you define the
following for the stairs: stair width, stair construction length, staircase
height, rise of the steps.
3 After you enter the dimensions for the staircase in the Dimensions page of
the ProSteel Stair dialog, the number of steps, gradient, tread depth, and
rise of the steps are calculated.
4 The ProSteel Ladder dialog defines ladders using the following page:
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Dimensions, Shapes, Wall Mounting, Safety Cage, Side Exit, and


Assignment.

Feb-12 217 Structural Elements


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Structural Elements
Module Review

218
Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
Extras
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Module Overview
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

This module contains information on creating shapes in ProSteel, including user-


created, standard user, roof and wall panels, combined and welded shapes. It also
explains exporting a file to pure AutoCAD, determining the center of gravity,
collision detection, and the unfold function.

Module Prerequisites
Student: Mariano Tomasino

• Basic Windows knowledge including file navigation, etc.


• Previous experience with a 3D CAD system, preferably AutoCAD.
• Completion of previous modules in this course recommended.

Module Objectives
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

After completing this module, you will be able to:


• Create a profile using closed Polylines.
• Use two or more native shapes to create a combined shape.
• Create a welded shape.
• Export to pure AutoCAD.
• Calculate the centre of gravity.
• Use the Collision Detection function and the Unfold function.

Feb-12 219 Extras

Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated


User-Created Shapes

User-Created Shapes
ProSteel 3D provides functionality to create different user-defined shapes. Using
User Shapes, Combined Shapes, Roof and Wall Panelling Shapes and Welded
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Shapes, you can create any user-definable shapes during a ProSteel 3D session
without having to go to a new dwg file to create them. Also, you do not have to
close ProSteel in order to load their definition like you would need to do if
modifying the shape databases. These shapes will react in similar fashion to
native ProSteel 3D shapes.

Shapes created by the user are classified in catalogues (folders on the hard drive).
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

To learn about these tools, start a new Imperial drawing or work on the side of the
current model.

Standard User Shape


Student: Mariano Tomasino

User shapes can be created from AutoCAD closed Polylines, with or without
internal islands (with closed Polylines).
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Before starting the exercise, draw the shape shown above using AutoCAD closed
polylines.

Extras 220 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Standard User Shape

 Exercise: Create a Similar Profile Using Closed Polylines


In this exercise, you will use the figure you just created which has one external
closed polyline and two internal closed polylines.
1 Select Create User Shape from the ProSteel Edit toolbar.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

2 Select User Shapes.


3 Right-click.
4 Select Create a new Catalog.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

5 Type Training in the provided field.


6 Right-click on the Training catalogue.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

7 Select Create User Shape.

Feb-12 221 Extras


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Standard User Shape

8 Type My First User Shape in the provided field using a normal resolution.

Note: You have the option of selecting a low, normal, or high resolution.
9 Right-click on My First User Shape.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

10 Select Create Normal Resolution.


The dialog temporarily disappears.
11 Select the outer contour Polyline.
12 Select the inner islands.
13 Press Enter twice.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

14 Type My First User Shape in the Name field.


The optionally provided information appears in the PS3D Properties and
can be extracted in the B.O.M.
15 Click the check mark.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Extras 222 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Standard User Shape

The creation process is complete, and the User Shape is created and ready
to be used from the Shape dialog (see below).
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 223 Extras


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Roof and Wall Panels

Roof and Wall Panels


Create a similar profile (see illustration) using a closed Polyline.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

The procedure to create Roof & Wall Panel Shapes is identical to the process
used to create a Standard User Shape.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Extras 224 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Combined Shapes

Combined Shapes
Combined shapes can be created out of two or more native ProSteel 3D shapes,
user-defined shapes or a mix of both. Create a similar profile (see illustration)
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

using native ProSteel 3D shapes.

Note: The shapes used to create a combined shape should be in the same
orientation and they should not be mirrored.

 Exercise: Use Two or More Native Shapes to Create a Combined Shape


1 Using the ProSteel Shapes dialog, create a geometry similar to the image
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

below with a standard "C" shape and a standard "S" “UB” shape from the
AISC catalogues.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

2 Use the Object View Centered command to orientate the view to the
section view of the two shapes.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

3 Select Create User Shape from the ProSteel Edit toolbar.


4 Select the User Shape Manager tab of the ProSteel User Shape Manager
dialog.

Feb-12 225 Extras


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Combined Shapes

5 Select Combined Shapes.


6 Right-click.
7 Select Create a new Catalog.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

8 Type Training in the provided field.


Student: Mariano Tomasino

9 Right-click on the Training catalogue.


10 Select Create CombiShape.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

11 Type My First Combined Shape in the provided field using a normal


resolution.

Note: You have the option of selecting a low, normal, or high resolution.
12 Right-click on My First Combined Shape.

Extras 226 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Combined Shapes

13 Select Create Normal Resolution.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The dialog temporarily disappears.


14 Select both steel shapes (S and C).
15 Press Enter twice.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

16 Type My First Combined Shape in the Name field.


The optionally provided information appears in the PS3D Properties and
can be extracted in the B.O.M.
17 Click the check mark.

Feb-12 227 Extras


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Combined Shapes

The creation process is completed.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

At this point the Combined Shape is created and ready to be used from the
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Shape dialog.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Extras 228 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Welded Shapes

Welded Shapes
Welded shapes consists of several plates welded together to form a profile. The
plates can be of different sizes and positions within the cross-section. They can be
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

treated or quantified as a single shape or as separate plates.

Like native ProSteel 3D shapes, welded shapes are created with a constant cross-
sectional depth/height and can be tapered using the PS3D Properties.

Two different kinds of welded shapes exist in ProSteel 3D: I-Form welded shape,
and welded shape with any number of plates.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

• I-Form Welded Shape - This shape is made up of three plates in the


form of an I-beam. The advantage of this type of shape is the ability to
modify the web plate by adding or removing vertexes using PS3D
Properties to create a complex form, as shown below.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

• Welded Shape with any number of plates - This shape is not limited by
the use of three plates in the shape of an I-beam.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

 Exercise: Create a Welded Shape


1 Select Create User Shape from the ProSteel Edit toolbar.
2 Select Weld Shapes.
3 Right-click.
4 Select Create a new Catalog.

Feb-12 229 Extras


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Welded Shapes

5 Type Training in the provided field.


6 Right-click on the Training catalogue.
7 Select Create WeldShape.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

8 Type My First Welded Shape in the provided field.


At this point you can create three different representations for low, normal
and high resolutions of My First Welded Shape. You will create a normal
resolution.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

9 Right-click on My First Welded Shape.


10 Select Create Normal Resolution.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

The dialog temporarily disappears and the Weld Shape editor appears.
11 Select Add Another Element to the Shape Definition.

Extras 230 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Welded Shapes

A new plate is inserted at the origin with 0 degree rotation.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

12 Enter the settings and values as shown below.


Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 231 Extras


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Welded Shapes

13 Repeat the previous operation three more times as shown below.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

14 Click the check mark.


The User Shape Properties dialog appears.
15 Type My First Welded Shape in the Name field.
The optionally provided information appears in the PS3D Properties and
can be extracted in the B.O.M.
16 Click the check mark.

Extras 232 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Welded Shapes

The User Shape Properties dialog closes.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

17 Click the check mark.


Student: Mariano Tomasino

The ProSteel User Shape Manager dialog closes.


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 233 Extras


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Welded Shapes

The Welded Shape is created and ready to be used from the Shape dialog.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Extras 234 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Export to Pure AutoCAD

Export to Pure AutoCAD


You can convert any ProSteel 3D model into a pure AutoCAD native file, using
either of these two options:
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

• Select ProSteel V8i > 2D > Create Pure AutoCAD dwg.


The ProSteel 3D file (plan, elevation or detail) is converted into pure
AutoCAD lines.
• Select ProSteel V8i > 2D > Create ACIS dwg.
The ProSteel 3D model is imported into other software that recognizes
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

AutoCAD solid but not ProSteel 3D objects.

These two commands produce a file that is strictly for viewing or distribution to
clients or subcontractors that have AutoCAD but not ProSteel 3D. The AutoCAD
file can be used to check the model. In the AutoCAD file, lines and arcs will be
converted into AutoCAD blocks.

Note: When you convert a ProSteel 3D model to AutoCAD, you lose all
Student: Mariano Tomasino

ProSteel 3D information in the current file.

Warning: When exporting a ProSteel 3D model to AutoCAD, work on a copy of the model, as
this is not a "Save As" procedure.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 235 Extras


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Centre of Gravity

Centre of Gravity
Use this function to calculate the centre of gravity of any number of selected
parts. (This is usually used to determine where to place lifting lugs, finding out
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

global weight and volume.)

To use this function do the following:


1 Select Center of Gravity on the ProSteel 3D Edit toolbar.
2 Select any number of shapes, plates, etc.
A sphere is created at the center of gravity of the selected objects and
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

information similar to the following appears at the command line/text screen:

SELECT OBJECTS: SPECIFY OPPOSITE CORNER: 117 FOUND


SELECT OBJECTS: RESULTING BODYVOLUME IS 72.196 FT^3
COORDINATE OF CENTER OF GRAVITY ARE X= 180.000 Y= 359.991 Z= 141.089
RESULTING BODYWEIGHT IN STEEL IS 35447.960

Note: Different specific weights are ignored; this function considers that all
Student: Mariano Tomasino

selected parts are made of steel.


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Extras 236 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Collision Detection

Collision Detection
This function is used to visually inspect and detect collisions between ProSteel 3D
objects in congested areas; it is not meant to clash-detect a massive structure.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

 Exercise: Use the Collision Detection Function


1 Create two crossing pipes as shown below.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

2 Select Collision Detection on the ProSteel 3D Edit toolbar.


The Collision Detection dialog opens.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

3 Enter values as shown below.


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

4 Select Collision Detection.


5 Select the newly-created pipes.
ProSteel 3D creates magenta-coloured volumes at each collision.
6 Select left or right arrows to move from one collision to another.
7 Select Collision Volumes Erased.
All collision volumes are erased.
• Min volume = Clash tolerance in cubic inches (mm³ if metric)
• Display scaling = Zooming factor
• Actual/Max = Total number of collisions

Feb-12 237 Extras


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Unfold

Unfold
This function is used to unfold/develop any ProSteel 3D shape with or without
modifications (cuts, drills, notches etc.) onto the current/active UCS.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

 Exercise: Unfold a Pipe


1 Start a new drawing.
2 Create similar pipes with a polycut and a Boolean subtract intersect, as
shown below.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

3 Select Unfold from the ProSteel 3D Edit toolbar.


The ProSteel Unfold Pipe dialog opens.
4 Enter values and settings as shown below.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

5 Click the check mark.


6 Select the part with the modification.
7 Place the result anywhere in the model.

Extras 238 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

239 Feb-12
The result should be as shown below.

Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated


Extras
Unfold
Module Review

Module Review

Questions
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

1 True or False: The shapes used to create a combined shape should be in


the same orientation and they should not be mirrored.
2 Two different kinds of welded shapes exist in ProSteel 3D. What are they?
3 There are two commands that convert any ProSteel 3D model into a pure
AutoCAD native file, strictly for viewing or distribution to clients or
subcontractors that have AutoCAD but not ProSteel 3D. What are they?
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Answers
1 True: The shapes used to create a combined shape should be in the same
orientation and they should not be mirrored.
2 The two kinds of welded shapes in ProSteel 3D are: I-Form welded shape,
Student: Mariano Tomasino

and welded shape with any number of plates.


3 When you select ProSteel V8i > 2D > Create Pure AutoCAD dwg, the
ProSteel 3D file (plan, elevation or detail) is converted into pure AutoCAD
lines.When you select ProSteel V8i > 2D > Create ACIS dwg, the ProSteel
3D model is imported into other software that recognizes AutoCAD solid
but not ProSteel 3D objects.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Extras 240 Feb-12


Copyright © 2012 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

ProSteel V8i
Fundamentals

Bentley Institute Course Guide


ProSteel V8i AutoCAD Detailing
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

242 ProSteel V8i AutoCAD Detailing Fundamentals


Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
Detailing Fundamentals
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Overview
Course Description
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

After you have created a model, completed your edits, positioned all of the
necessary components, and possibly issued a preliminary parts list, the Finishing
or Detailing of the 3D components can commence. ProSteel generates the usual
2D views of the components for the workshop plans using the model, as follows:
• ProSteel will dissemble the model into its components, analyse the geometry
of all the individual parts, and ascertain any existing invisible edges.
• Then, depending on the requirements of your selections, the shape is
Student: Mariano Tomasino

displayed in several views, dimensioned, and attached to a position flag.

Note: All of this takes place in a split second and in the background.
• Once ProSteel has finished with one component, this component is deposited
in a library in the form of a block, clearly organized according to the individual
construction groups and design sections.

After this procedure had concluded, you can further use ProSteel to help you with
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

the layout of the parts on your drawing sheets. From here on, you can treat the
parts as if they were the typical drawings generated in a CAD program, although
ProSteel will offer you a few extra functions to facilitate your work.

Target Audience
This course is recommended for the following audience(s):
• Structural Designer
• Structural Engineer
• Structural Engineering Technician
• Architect

Feb-12 243 Detailing Fundamentals Overview

Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated


Prerequisites

• Architectural Designer
• Architectural Engineer
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Prerequisites
• Experience with AutoCAD 2D/3D experience
• Experience with ProSteel Modeller V8i for AutoCAD
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Course Objectives
After completing this course, you will be able to:
• Define different user styles such as the bolt, elevation flag or weld flag
• Understand ProSteel’s grouping
Student: Mariano Tomasino

• Learn how to create Part Descriptions and Part Families for steel members by
categorizing different types of components (e.g., columns, beams, gusset
plates, etc.)
• Create and set styles for different final 2D drawing types
• Create customized 2D drawing styles to the company standard
• Create 2D plans, elevations and sections from 3D models
• Create and edit material take-offs directly into the drawings or externally
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

through a database
• Create steel single member part details
• Create beam and column group detail

Modules Included
The following modules are included in this course:
• User Defined Styles and Symbols
• ProSteel Grouping
• Creating and Manipulating Part Families, Part Descriptions
• Positioning and Material Take Offs

Detailing Fundamentals Overview 244 Feb-12


Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Modules Included

• Components Required Prior to 2D Drawing Creation


• DetailCentre
• Detail Styles
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

• Appendix, Bentley ProSteel Course Setup


Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 245 Detailing Fundamentals Overview


Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Modules Included

246 Detailing Fundamentals Overview


Copyright © 2010 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
User Defined Styles and
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Symbols
Module Overview
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

This chapter includes two lessons: User Defined Styles; and User Defined Symbols.
You will learn how to establish the styles and what they will be used for.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 247 User Defined Styles and Symbols

Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated


Lesson 1: User Defined Styles

Lesson 1: User Defined Styles


In ProSteel, you can customize (create and use) the graphical representation or
symbol for Bench Marks, Elevation Flags, Grid Axis, Handrail, Manual Cuts,
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Position Flags, Stair Steps and Weld Flags. Those blocks can be assigned to styles,
which in turn can be used and specified in the 3D model as well as in the
DetailCentre for 2D drawing production.

All ProSteel blocks are grouped into categories within the User Blocks folder.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Bolt Style
 Exercise: Creating a new bolt style
1 To create a new bolt style, click first on the Bolting button on the ProSteel
Elements toolbar to bring up the dialog.
2 In the Sort tab, click on create a new bolt style.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

3 Enter a name for the new bolt style (i.e. 8.8S SHOP with 2FW+1HN), then
click OK.
Your new bolt style will be listed in the loaded styles.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

4 Move to the Bolt Style tab and select the newly created bolt style from the
Bolt Style drop-down list.
5 Click on the bolt settings button and enter all desired specifications (see
illustration bellow) then click OK.

User Defined Styles and Symbols 248 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: User Defined Styles
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

6 Next click on the washer buttons and enter all desired specifications to
match the following image, then click OK.

Feb-12 249 User Defined Styles and Symbols


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: User Defined Styles
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

7 Click on the nut button and enter all desired specifications to match the
following image, then click OK.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

8 Repeat the previous steps if a tapered washer or a lock nut are desired.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

At this point the newly created Bolt Style is ready for use in the active drawing, to
have it available for other drawings click on the button and save the style
externally.

Once the new style is saved externally it can be loaded into a drawing by clicking
on the Load style definition from a file button.

User Defined Styles and Symbols 250 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Detail Style

Detail Style
This will be covered in Detail Center Section of this Manual.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Elevation Flag Style


 Exercise: Creating a new elevation flag style
1 To create a new elevation flag style, click first on the Elevation Symbols
button on the ProSteel Utilities toolbar.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

2 In the Sort tab, click on create a new elevation flag style.


3 Enter a name for the new elevation flag style (i.e. DEFAULT), then click OK.
Your new elevation flag style will be listed in the loaded styles (as following
image).
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

4 Move to the Layout tab and select the newly created elevation flag style
from the Elevation Flag drop down.
5 Select Created geometry, then click on the Edit style.
6 Enter all desired specifications to match the illustration below, then click
the check button.

Feb-12 251 User Defined Styles and Symbols


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Detail Style
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Hint: The Text Style is created from the AutoCAD Text Style command, in the same
manner as the creation of the Dimension Style.

At this point the newly created elevation flag style is ready for use in the active
Student: Mariano Tomasino

drawing. To have it available for other drawings, click the Save icon to save the
style externally.

Once the new style is saved externally, it can be loaded into a drawing by clicking
on the Load Style Definition from a File icon.

Position Flag Style


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

This will be covered in Detail Centre Section of this Manual.

Weld Flag Style


 Exercise: Creating a weld flag style
1 To create a new weld flag style, click on the Welding Symbols button on
the ProSteel Utilities toolbar to bring up the dialog.
2 In the Sort tab, click on Create a new weld style.
3 Enter a name for the new weld flag style (i.e. Fillet All Around TYP.), then
click the check button.
Your new weld flag style will be listed in the loaded styles (see illustration
below).

User Defined Styles and Symbols 252 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Detail Style
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

4 Click on the Weld Style Display tab and select the newly created weld flag
style from the Weld style drop-down.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

5 Select Created geometry, then click on the Flag-specific settings.


6 Enter all desired specifications (see dialog below), then click the check
button.

Feb-12 253 User Defined Styles and Symbols


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Detail Style
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

7 Click on Top side or Down side to set weld symbol specifications (see
below), then click the check button.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

At this point the newly created weld flag style is ready for use in the active
drawing. To have it available for other drawings, click on the Save icon and
save the style externally.
Once the new style is saved externally, you can load it into a drawing by
clicking on Load style definition from a file icon.

User Defined Styles and Symbols 254 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 2: User Defined Symbols

Lesson 2: User Defined Symbols


This lesson describes how to create user-defined symbols in ProSteel.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Benchmark symbol (north direction)


The Benchmark is a symbol/marker that can be inserted into the 3D model to
specify/control the north direction for erection purpose. The ProSteel Benchmark
has the tabs shown below:
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 255 User Defined Styles and Symbols


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

User Defined Styles and Symbols


Lesson 2: User Defined Symbols

256
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
Lesson 2: User Defined Symbols
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

To insert a benchmark into the 3D model, click the Benchmark icon on the
ProSteel Utilities toolbar, then specify an origin/point and a north direction.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Elevation Flags Symbol


You can create any desired symbol for the elevation flag with Lines, Arcs, Circles
and Text only. Add to them an attribute with the tag VP for the elevation value,
and N1&N2 for Notes 1 & 2. Then save the block in the ELAVATIONFLAGS folder.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Warning: The attribute must not be mirrored and should be in the Positive area in both axes,
so that the lowest point of the graphics is at 0,0 in WCS Coordinate.

Click on Elevation symbols; the dialog will appear. In the Layout tab click on Block
path to select ..\USERBLOCKS\ELEVATIONFLAGS\. Enable Block Geometry and
select the newly created block from the Block Geometry dropdown (see
illustration).

Feb-12 257 User Defined Styles and Symbols


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 2: User Defined Symbols
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

At this point the newly created Elevation Flag symbol is ready to be used.

Grid Text Blocks Symbol


Student: Mariano Tomasino

You can create any desired symbol for the grid text blocks with Lines, Arcs, Circle
and Text only. Add to them two attributes, one with the tag LINE1 for the column
grid value and another if desired with the tag LINE2 for a column sub grid value.

Save the block in the GRIDTEXTBLOCKS folder. You will also need to create four
invisible attributes for the docking lines DP1, DP2, DP3 & DP4.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Warning: The attribute must not be mirrored and should be in the Positive area in both axes,
so that the lowest point of the graphics is at 0,0 in WCS Coordinate.

At this point the newly created grid text block symbol is ready to be used.

Click on Workframe; the dialog will appear after specifying an origin and a
direction.

In the Layout tab, check the Axis descriptions box. In the Layout area of the TextX
tab, select block from the dropdown of axis description type.

Repeat the same for the TextY; in the Blocks tab, turn on the Enable from file
button, then click on Block path to select ..\USERBLOCKS\GRIDAXIS\. Select
desired blocks from the Block nameX and Block nameY drop-downs.

User Defined Styles and Symbols 258 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 2: User Defined Symbols
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

At this point the newly created grid text blocks will be applied to the work frame.

Manual Cut Symbol


You can create any desired symbol for the Manual Cut with lines, arcs, circles and
Student: Mariano Tomasino

text only, then save the block in the MANUALCUT folder.

At this point the newly created manual cut symbol is ready to be used. Click on
Create 2D Section. In the dialog that appears, in the Symbol tab, enable the Block
button, then specify the Top Block and Down Block by clicking the Block path
button to select the ..\USERBLOCKS\MANUALCUT\ folder (see illustration).
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

At this point, the newly created ManualCuts can be used in the drawing.

Feb-12 259 User Defined Styles and Symbols


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 2: User Defined Symbols

Position Flags Symbol


This will be covered in Detail Centre Section of this Manual.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Weld Flags Symbol


You can create any desired symbol for the weld flags with Lines, Arcs, Circle and
Text only. Add to them two attributes, one with the tag DP1 and the other tag DP2
defining insertion points. The flag reference line will connect to the closest one.
You can also add any number of attributes from the list of available attributes
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

below, then save the block in the WELDFLAGS folder.


• TT: Topside/far side Thickness
• TL: Topside/far side Length
• TG: Topside/far side Gap/interval
• TC: Topside/line1 Comment
• DT: Downside/near side Thickness
Student: Mariano Tomasino

• DL: Downside/near side Length


• DG: Downside/near side Gap/interval
• DC: Downside/line2 Comment

Warning: The attribute must not be mirrored and should be in the Positive area in both axes,
so that the lowest point of the graphics is at 0,0 in WCS Coordinate.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

At this point the newly created weld flag symbol is ready to be used. Click on
Welding Symbols; the dialog will appear. In the Weld Style Display tab, click on
Block path to select ..\USERBLOCKS\WELDFLAGS\.

Enable Block Geometry and select the newly created block from the Block
Geometry dropdown (see illustration).

User Defined Styles and Symbols 260 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 2: User Defined Symbols
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

At this point the newly created weld flag can be inserted into the drawing.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 261 User Defined Styles and Symbols


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

User Defined Styles and Symbols


Lesson 2: User Defined Symbols

262
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
ProSteel Grouping
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Module Overview
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

This chapter discusses Groups. Each Group always consists of one primary
component part and as many secondary parts as desired. Groups cannot be
nested, which means that a group cannot be a secondary part of another group.

Module Objectives
Student: Mariano Tomasino

• Learn how to invoke the Groups dialog


• Learn how to determine what parts exist in groups and which parts are not in
a group
• Learn how to manipulate the display within the model using groups
• Learn how to add parts to an existing group
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 263 ProSteel Grouping

Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated


Lesson 1: ProSteel Grouping

Lesson 1: ProSteel Grouping

Grouping
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Grouping in ProSteel is synonymous to assembly. It defines which parts are


detailed and shipped together. Due to its importance, ProSteel provides a number
of tools for creating, editing, deleting, searching, viewing, etc. A main member
and any number of sub-members define a group structure, however, if desired, a
group can be assigned to a single member that is the main part.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Note: Each element can exist only in one Group at a time. When creating groups, start
with the sub-groups and lastly the assemblies. In most cases you will simply
work with the groups. The sub-groups and assemblies features are for
exceptional use.

Assemblies
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Assemblies can include groups and subgroups as well as single parts. There is no
main part to an assembly, just a collection of various objects. It is the largest of
the three group types.

Groups
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

A group is a collection of parts and/or sub-groups, which are recognized as a


single item. A main part is assigned to the group and all other parts are
considered subparts of the group. These groups can be called into a 2D drawing
and dimensioned together as a single item. Groups are the default type created
when doing connections and other tasks that have the Group option within its
menu.

ProSteel Grouping 264 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: ProSteel Grouping
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Sub-Groups

Almost identical in nature to the groups, Sub-Groups are handled in the same way
Student: Mariano Tomasino

that groups are and have access to all the same tools as groups do.

Sub-groups can be used when one single part is required in two groups. Since a
single part can only be part of one Group at a time, a Sub-Group can be formed
and the same single part can be placed into this second group type structure.

 Exercise: Invoking the Groups dialog


Open the example model TRNMODEL.dwg, located in the provided
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

1
datasets.
2 Select isometric view (click Isometric Overview icon).
3 Open the Administer Groups dialog (ProStructures 3D > Groups > Dialog)
or click Group icon.

Feb-12 265 ProSteel Grouping


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: ProSteel Grouping

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Administer Groups
dialog.

Name Description
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Create You can assign parts to material groups by using this function.

Click the main part of the material group and then select the parts to be assigned.

The parts to be assigned can also be selected in a field. The main part that may have
been selected twice and other construction lines are ignored in this case. Only steel or
special parts can be selected for a group.

The part's new selection is ignored if it already belongs to a group.


Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Release A group can be detached by using this function. To do so, click any part of the group.
Removal of single parts from the group is also possible.

Delete You can delete all parts of a group with this function. Click any part of the group to do
this.

Edit This function shows the group data through the following dialog.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

You can enter the data of the selected group for the parts lists in the top fields.
The position in the field Pos. No. has been taken over from the main part, provided the
"Takeover Mainpart Info" field was selected. Subsequent modification of the position
number is possible.

You can see the outer dimensions and the total weight of the group at the bottom.

Takeover The data of the main part is accepted as group data for the parts lists. Subsequent
Mainpart Data modification of this data is possible.

Add Elements Parts are added to a group by using of this function. The complete group will be
selected when you click any part of the group. Further Accessory Parts can be added by
clicking them.

ProSteel Grouping 266 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: ProSteel Grouping

Name Description
Remove Elements Parts are removed from a group by using this function. The complete group will be
selected when you click any part of the group. Click the parts to be removed.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Export A group can be exported and stored in an external dwg file. It can be inserted into
another drawing by using Import Groups. The group structure will remain unchanged.
When prompted, select objects by clicking any part of the group.

Import A stored group can be inserted into your drawing by using this function. The existing
group structure is maintained, when the field Explode Blocks after Insertion has been
clicked, or if you drop the imported cell using PS_EXPLODE.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Selection Mode You decide whether a group is to be loaded completely when selecting a part of it or
whether the parts shall remain independent with this function. Click any part of the
group. The mode will change according to your selection, and the current status will be
displayed in the command line.
Export Complete When Exporting, this enables you to select a whole group by selecting just one
Group member.If you want to move the whole Group with the AutoCAD Move tool, it is
enough to select only one Part. If this field is unmarked, you need to select all Parts
explicitly to manipulate them. All Groups generated by ProSteel during a connection
have this feature enabled.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Dissolve Block The group is automatically exploded when being imported. The structure of the group
after Insert remains unchanged.

Count All groups in the drawing are counted and displayed in the Number field below this
button.

4 Click on the Verify tab and review the following functions.


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

The following table provides a description of the fields in the Verify tab.

Name Description
Check Groups Mark Orphans: If this field is checked, all valid groups are hidden according to the
specifications when checking a group. Parts that belong to no group are marked in
colour. Use the command Global Settings > Colours to specify what colours to apply.
Coloured markings are removed once you assign the parts to a group or when you
select the ProSteel Regen command.

Orphans -> Creates one group out of each selected Orphan object.
Groups

Feb-12 267 ProSteel Grouping


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: ProSteel Grouping

Name Description
Search Hiding other groups can be used to search for groups. Enter the position numbers of the
groups to be searched in the field Search Numbers and click the button Search.

Select the parts to be searched (in most cases, you will select all of the parts in a field)
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

and confirm your selection by pressing the Enter key or the right mouse button. Only
those groups whose position numbers you have entered will remain visible. By using
the Regenerate command you can recall the other groups.

Several position numbers can be entered at the same time, provided they are separated
by a decimal point. Complete position areas must be separated by a hyphen. If you
search the positions No. 5 and 7 or 17 through 28, you enter the value 5,7,17-28 in the
Search Numbers field.

If the Hide field is enabled, all parts not satisfying the search condition are hidden. The
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

hidden parts become visible again when the drawing is regenerated.

If the Mark field is enabled, all of the parts found in the searched are highlighted in the
drawing.

If the Zoom Extents field is enabled, all parts satisfying the search condition are
automatically zoomed. A dialog displays allowing you to indicate the Display Size (zoom
factor) and to navigate to each component found.

Hide Using the MainPart, Singleparts, and All Parts options in this section you choose which
parts of a group you can hide. Click any part of the group to do this. You can recall the
Student: Mariano Tomasino

parts using the Display command.

Display Displays all hidden groups or group parts.


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Compare Groups of the same position are checked for equality in this function. Select main Parts
of the group to be checked. If the Compare and change option is enabled and the
program finds groups with the same position number but with different structure,
indices are added to the position numbers to differentiate them.

ProSteel Grouping 268 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 2: Parts in a Group

Lesson 2: Parts in a Group


Sometimes you can work with existing groups and not know what parts are in the
group. This exercise shows you how to determine this information.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

 Exercise: Determining what parts are in a group


1 With the Administer Groups dialog displayed and the Verify tab selected,
select the Check Groups button and note the display in the model.
2 Refresh your display to show all parts in the model (ProStructures 3D >
Groups > Dialog, then press Display).
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

What just happened? When initiating the Check Groups function, ProSteel scans
the model and searches for all parts associated to a group and disables their
display. This acts as quick reference to determine what parts are not in a group
and leaves these elements displayed. This will allow you to better determine
which groups, if any, these rogue elements belong in.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Before we start adding these parts into a group we will investigate other functions
within the Groups function.

Feb-12 269 ProSteel Grouping


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 3: Controlling Model Display via the Groups Function

Lesson 3: Controlling Model Display via the Groups Function


You can use the Groups functionality to control how your model is displayed.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

 Exercise: Controlling the model display using Groups


1 Window Area on the connection between the crossbeam and the column
located at coordinate A1.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

2 Open the Administer Groups dialog (ProStructures 3D > Groups > Dialog).
3 Click on the Verify tab. With the All Parts option enabled, press the Hide
button.

ProSteel Grouping 270 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 3: Controlling Model Display via the Groups Function
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

The Select Part of Group to be Hidden: prompt is displayed.


4 Pick the cross beam and note the display of the model. Right click to end
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

the Hide Groups function.


Note that all parts of the group disappeared from the view of the model.
This shows how the hide groups function can be used to control model
display. This is very important when working with a large model congested
by many parts and detailed joints.
5 With the Administer Groups dialog still displayed, press the Display button
to return the model to a full display of all parts.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

We will perform the same operation again, only this time with grouping
hiding only certain elements of the group.
6 Load the group function and, before pressing the Hide button, set the Hide
section of the dialog to hide only Single Parts by enabling the pull-down
selection as shown below.
7 Now press the Hide button and pick the same cross beam as before. Note
the display within the model. This time only the Sub Parts of the group
have been hidden.
8 From the ProStructures 3D menu, select ProSteel Regen to return the set
the display to all parts.

Note: Before moving onto building groups it is important to differentiate


between the Release button and the Delete button that are located in
the Admin tab.

Feb-12 271 ProSteel Grouping


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 3: Controlling Model Display via the Groups Function

If you wish to break up a group and still have the parts in the model, use
the Release function. This will dissolve the group but leave all parts in
the model.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

If you wish to completely remove the grouped parts from the model,
use the Delete button. This will dissolve the group and delete these
items from the model.

Note: The Single Parts selection in the Verify tab actually refers to sub-parts of
groups, not single loose parts.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The Settings Tab, shown below, gives the user the possibility to make
multiple selections or loop grouping command.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

ProSteel Grouping 272 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 4: Adding Component Parts to a Group

Lesson 4: Adding Component Parts to a Group


In this lesson, you will learn how to add parts to an existing group.
1 Window into the area of two manual base plates located on columns
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

located at coordinates C2 and C3 (click Isometric Overview icon).


Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

2 Using the Hide Except Group tool, pick the columns at C2 and C3.
Everything should disappear except for the columns and the elements that
should be a part of it.
3 Use the ProSteel Regenerate tool to show the whole model.
We will now add those baseplates to be grouped with the columns
4 Open the Administer Groups dialog (ProStructures 3D > Groups > Dialog >
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Admin) or click Administer Group icon.


5 From the Groups tab, select the Add Elements button.
The following prompt is displayed: Pick a Part of the required group
6 Pick the column located at coordinate C2.
The following prompt is displayed: Select Parts to add to the selected
Group
7 Pick the base plate located at the bottom of the column. Right click to end
the addition of parts, and then right click a second time to end the
function.

Note: After selecting the group part to which you will add components, the
software will automatically shift to the ADD function and prompt you to
pick those elements to add. Continue selecting parts until you are

Feb-12 273 ProSteel Grouping


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 4: Adding Component Parts to a Group

finished. Right click to select another group part to add items to. Right
click twice to end the Add Elements function.
8 Repeat the process and add the other plate to the group of the column
located at coordinate C3.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

ProSteel Grouping 274 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Part Families and Part
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Descriptions
Module Overview
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

In this chapter, you will learn how to create ProSteel Part Families, modify them,
and create a Part Description for them.

Modules Objectives
• Learn about Display Classes, Area Classes and Part Families
Student: Mariano Tomasino

• Create Display Classes, Area Classes and Part Families


• Assign our Workframe to the Display Classes, Area Classes and Part Families
• Cycle the Display Classes to control the view in the model
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 275 Part Families and Part Descriptions

Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated


Lesson 1: Creating and Manipulating Part Families

Lesson 1: Creating and Manipulating Part Families


In this section, you will learn what Display Classes, Area Classes, and Part Families
are and how to create them. Additionally you will learn how to assign structural
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

elements and objects to them to make viewing the model easier in the case of
complex models.

Part Families
Part Families are a mechanism to automatically allocate prefixes, colours and
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

DetailStyles during the positioning process by categorizing different types of


components (e.g., columns, beams, gusset plates, etc). 2D line types and colour
can also be controlled through the Part Families.

In this section, you will learn how to create Part Families. Some of the display
classes you create will be used later in the modelling process.

Part Families should be created, components assigned to these and then the Part
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Family prefix should be used during positioning.

Note: Each component can belong to only one Part Family at a time.

 Exercise: Creating Part Families and assigning Objects to them


1 Open the example model TRNMODEL.dwg, in the provided datasets.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Part Families and Part Descriptions 276 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Creating and Manipulating Part Families

2 Open the ProSteel Part Families dialog (ProStructures 3D > Part Families)
or click the PartFamilies icon.
3 You must assign names to the Part Families. Double click on one of the
empty list entries and enter a name in the input field.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

A new dialog will appear.


4 Enter Description, Pos Prefix and Colour.
5 Assign names to Part Families, as shown below.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 277 Part Families and Part Descriptions


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 2: User-defined Part Description

Lesson 2: User-defined Part Description


ProSteel provides a mechanism to assign user definable part/shape descriptions
that can be used during the creation and editing of parts (e.g., specifying layer,
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

colour and linetype), searching and organizing and filtering the display of parts
and the dimensioning rules during 2D drawing production.

 Exercise: Assigning a description to a shape


1 Select a shape in the 3D model.
2 Right click and select PS Properties from the context menu.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The Shape Properties dialog will appear.


3 From the Description drop-down in the Assignment tab, select any
predefined description.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

This drop-down list is controlled by a text file


(..\LOCALISED\ENGLISH\DATA\PRO_ST3D.FDF). It contains some
predefined descriptions but is modifiable by the user with the help of a
text editor such as Microsoft Notepad.

Part Families and Part Descriptions 278 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 2: User-defined Part Description
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

The PRO_ST3D.FDF data content is arranged as follows:


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Index, description [layername, layercolor, layerlinetype][,colour normal,


linetype normal, colour hidden, linetype hidden]
Note that "normal" implies visible lines on 2D details and "hidden" implies
hidden lines on 2D details.

Feb-12 279 Part Families and Part Descriptions


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Part Families and Part Descriptions


Lesson 2: User-defined Part Description

280
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
Positioning and Material
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Takeoffs
Module Overview
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

This module contains three lessons: Positioning the Model; Creating a Parts List;
and Creating a Drawing Parts List. Each Lesson contains a number of exercises that
are designed to teach you the topics listed in the objectives.

Module Objectives
Student: Mariano Tomasino

After completing Lesson 1 in this module, you will be able to:


• Set the defaults for Positioning
• Define the Position Flags
• Position the Model

After completing Lesson 2 in this module, you will be able to:


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

• Create an external parts list


• Edit the parts list data and format
• Generate the actual report

After completing Lesson 3 in this module, you will be able to:


• Learn how to create a parts list
• Modify the partlist contents

Feb-12 281 Positioning and Material Takeoffs

Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated


Lesson 1: Positioning the Model

Lesson 1: Positioning the Model


In this section, you will learn how to set the defaults for positioning, define the
position flags, and position the model.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

 Exercise 1: Setting the Defaults for Positioning


1 Open the example model TRNMODEL.dgn, located in the Project
ProSteel_Metric.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

2 View the isometric view of the model by selecting the main menus item
ProStructures 3D > Zoom/Views > Isometric Overview.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

3 Open the ProSteel Positionflags and Positioning dialog by selecting the


main menu item ProStructures 3D > Positioning > Dialog or select the
Positioning icon. In the dialog, select the Steel Positioning tab.

Positioning and Material Takeoffs 282 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Positioning the Model
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Descriptions of the fields in the Steel Positioning tab are provided in the table
below:
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Name Description
Plugin List shows all available external positioning plug-ins. This list is only available when the
Use external Plug-In option is enabled.

Type Allows you to enter the type of the position number.

Numerical means that the position numbers are composed of numbers only.

Alphanumerical means that the position numbers are composed of letters only. The
order then is A, B, ..., Z, AA, AB,.... etc.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Mixed means that the position numbers are composed of a numerical and an
alphanumerical part. The numerical part is following the alphanumerical part, the order
is A1, A2,..., A9, B1, B2, etc. The number of numerical positions can be preset under ->
'Limits'.

Filter Allows you to determine which parts to be positioned.

All: When pressing this button, all selected parts will be positioned.

Only Empty: When pressing this button, only those selected parts will be positioned
that have not yet been assigned a position number (e.g., new parts).

Only Changed: When pressing this button, only those selected parts will be positioned
that have been changed. Thus, after detailing changed parts can be assigned new
position numbers, if necessary the parts are identified using "Modification Tags," which
will be deleted when the part concerned is detailed. This means that parts are assigned
new position numbers that have active change tags (query via command 'Shapes >
Change Properties > Data').

Feb-12 283 Positioning and Material Takeoffs


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Positioning the Model

Name Description
Last Single Displays the last used position number for single elements.

Last Group Displays the last used position number for group elements.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Increment In the Increment field you enter automatic incrementing of the position numbers
(normally by one step).

Next In the Next No. field you enter the number to be assigned to the first part to be
positioned.

Use Shipping Enable this option to use Send Numbers instead of Position numbers.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Number

Use X-refs Enables the use of an external plug-in for positioning instead of using the built in default
functions.

Calls the dialog for automatic positioning.

Resets the Positioning options.


Student: Mariano Tomasino

Processes automatic positioning only for single parts with the given settings.

Processes automatic positioning only for groups with the given settings.

Processes automatic positioning for both parts and groups with the given settings.

4 After reviewing the setting for positioning, you will set the options for
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Automatic Positioning. In the ProSteel Positionflags and Positioning dialog,


select the Call the Dialog for Automatic Positioning icon and set the
parameters on each tab as follows:

Positioning and Material Takeoffs 284 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

285 Feb-12
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Positioning and Material Takeoffs
Lesson 1: Positioning the Model
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Positioning and Material Takeoffs


Lesson 1: Positioning the Model

286
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
Lesson 1: Positioning the Model

Descriptions of the fields in the above dialog are provided in the table below:

Name Description
Filter These parts are considered in case of automatic positioning. Select the parts (shapes,
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

special shapes, plates, bolts and other special parts) that are to be numbered in one
operation.

Sort Flats like Plates: Enable this option to consider Flats and Plates equal for Pre-
Sorting.

Pre-Sort (Left Sets the order of the Pre-Sort. Use the arrow buttons next to the window to move a
Window) value up or down.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Post-Sort Sets the Order of the Post-Sort. Use the arrow buttons next to the window to move a
value up or down.

Options Overwrite Existing means existing position numbers will be overwritten when assigning
new ones.

If Equal Part Detection is enabled, the parts are checked for equality. If they are
identical, they are assigned the same position number. Parts are considered identical
when deviations with respect to dimensions and drill diameter are within the values
given as reference tolerances.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

If Equal Group Detection is enabled, the groups are checked for equality. Groups are
considered identical when identical parts are arranged in the same mounting position -
single parts are only compared using their position number (i.e., if parts are identical
but have different position numbers, the groups will also be assigned different position
numbers).

If Consider Weld Marks is enabled then Weld Marks are used to compare elements.

First Main Parts, then Sub Parts means that first, all main parts of groups are positioned
(and sorted according to the sorting criteria within the groups), followed by the
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

accessory parts (also sorted according to the sorting criteria). This can be deemed as an
additional, even higher ranking sorting criterion.

Subparts starts at: Determines from which number, group subparts will be positioned.

Groups Differentiation Unequal Groups: When the group is assigned the position of the main
part (normal case), it may happen that two different groups having the same main part
are assigned identical position numbers. In such cases, the program will check whether
or not the groups are really identical. If not, it will change the group position number.

25 -> 25.1 means the changed group positions are identified by the index.1, etc.,
following their position number (i.e., 100.1, 100.2,...).

25 ->25A means the changed group positions are identified by the index A, etc.,
following their position number (i.e. 100A, 100B,...).

25 -> MAX+1 means positioning of the changed group positions is continued after the
highest position currently assigned.

Feb-12 287 Positioning and Material Takeoffs


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Positioning the Model

Name Description
Group Options The Max = Subpart Max option determines if the next available Position number is a
single or group number

If Takeover MainPart Position ->Group is enabled, the position of the main part is taken
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

over as group position. If necessary, the group position is changed afterwards (see
Differentiation Groups). If this is not requested, the group positions will start at the
position entered in GroupsStart at the Last [+].

Position Prefix This allows explanatory text to be entered before the group position. It is possible to
differentiate between support beams, girders and other groups, the differentiation
always being related to the main part of the group.

In Columns, you enter the designation for all vertical shapes. In the attribute field
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Deviation in Degrees, you enter an angle within which the shape is still considered to be
vertical.

In Beams, you enter the designation for all horizontal shapes. In the attribute field
Deviation in Degrees, you enter an angle within which the shape is still considered to be
horizontal. Vertical and horizontal are always related to the work frame, i.e., to the x/y
plane of the WCS.

In Other, you enter the designation for all other groups.

The Position Tolerance fields determine the position tolerance for vertical columns and
Student: Mariano Tomasino

horizontal beams.

If Use Part Family Prefixes is enabled, the family classes prefix is set in front if the
component part belongs to a family class and a prefix is planned.

Tolerances Geometry Check: Compares the parts with the visible geometry, line for line.
Geometry Check
Minimum Line Length means additional lines up to the specified length are not
considered for a comparison.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Length Tolerance means length deviations do not result in a different part.

Hole Tolerance means deviations of the drill hole axis up to the specified length do not
result in a different part.

Tolerances Compares the parts with the visible volume. You cannot mix Facet and Acis bodies.
Volume Check
Max Part Difference: Sets the maximum difference in % up to which the elements are
treated as identical.

Max. Group Difference: Sets the maximum difference in % up to which the groups are
treated as identical.

5 Once the parameters are specified, click OK to return to the ProSteel


Positionflags and Positioning dialog. Keep this dialog open for the next
exercise.

Positioning and Material Takeoffs 288 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Positioning the Model

 Exercise 2: Define Position Flags


1 Click on the Sort tab in the ProSteel Positionflags and Positioning dialog.
Select the Creates a New Position Flag Style icon.
This creates a New Position Flag Style icon.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

2 Type Singleparts into the Enter the Name of the new Positionflag Style
dialog, and then click OK. Repeat this procedure to add a Bolts style. When
finished, the new styles will be displayed in the Loaded Styles window, as
shown below:
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

3 Click on the Layout tab in the ProSteel Positionflags and Positioning dialog.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 289 Positioning and Material Takeoffs


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Positioning the Model

4 Select Singleparts in the Style filed and then select the Enables Setting of
Position Flag Style icon, adjacent to the Created Geometry field.
5 Set the parameters for the Singleparts style in the Posflag Definition dialog
as seen below. Click the check button to apply the settings.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Positioning and Material Takeoffs 290 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Positioning the Model

Descriptions of the fields in the above dialog are provided in the table below:

Name Description
LineType Allows you to define the kind of guideline to be used.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

No Line - No guideline will be displayed.

Normal Line - Only one line will be displayed.

Line with Arrow - A line with an arrow will be displayed.

Line with Dot - A line with a point will be displayed.

Bubble Form Allows you to define the kind of position number.


Company: Seibo Ingeniería

No Bubble: only the number is displayed.

Round Bubble: the number is displayed in an oval.

Rectangular Bubble: the number is displayed in a field.

Six Edged Bubble: the number is displayed in a hexagon.

On Line: the number is displayed on the construction line.


Student: Mariano Tomasino

Text Type Allows you to define the type of shape designation in case of length indication.

U100...160: the designation is as follows…IPE270... 7890.

U100 160: the designation is as follows…IPE270 - 7890.

U100x160: the designation is as follows… IPE270x7890.

Format Template: The designation is as indicated in the 'Format Template' input field.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Alignment Allows you to determine the direction of the construction line with respect to the
position text.

At Shape: the direction is in parallel to shape.

At Line: you will be prompted to enter a reference line by clicking. Text will be aligned
accordingly.

At Horizon: the direction is horizontal.

At Vertical: the direction is vertical.

Text Style Specifies the text style for the text of the position flag.

Feb-12 291 Positioning and Material Takeoffs


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Positioning the Model

Name Description
Default Format Specifies the format for the user-defined shape designation if you have selected 'Format
Template' as text type. The following parameters are available.
$(N) for part name
$(L) for part length
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

$(W) for part width


$(T) for part thickness

The result of the format string $(N) $(T)x$(W) would e.g. be plate 5x380

Pos-Nr. Prefix/ In the input field Prefix or Postfix you can enter a text which is displayed in front of or
Postfix after the position of the position flag. The default can be set independently of each
other for both numbers.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Shipping-Nr. In the input field Prefix or Postfix you can enter a text which is displayed in front of or
Prefix/Postfix after the shipping number of the position flag. The default can be set independently of
each other for both numbers.

Divide Specifies a text which is written between position number and shipping number, if both
numbers have to be displayed as position number entry in the position flag.

Layout Allows you to determine which information to be displayed.


Student: Mariano Tomasino

Total Number: the number of parts is displayed, e.g., 17 x IPE 270.

Name: the designation is displayed (e.g., the shape designation).

Comment: the comments of the parts lists are displayed.

Item Number: display the Article number of the parts in the position flag.

Dimensions: display the parts dimensions of the parts in the position flag.

Position number: the position number is displayed.


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Shipping Number: the shipping number is displayed.

Material: the material designation is displayed.

Original Position Number: the fixed (former) position number is displayed.

Options No Line: suppresses the leader line of the position flag.

Dynamic: Creates an association between the object and the position flag.

Group Length: Use group dimension for display if a group is selected.

Positioning and Material Takeoffs 292 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Positioning the Model

Name Description
Size You can define the text size for general lettering and for position numbers (No.size). For
printing, the MicroStation text sizes are scaled according to selected scale.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Colours You set the corresponding colour for the flag as MicroStation colour number using the
fields Line, Number, Bubble and Text. If you enter -1 as value, the pre-setting will be
used.

6 Select Bolts in the Style filed and then select the Enables Setting of
Position Flag Style icon, adjacent to the Created Geometry field.

Note: Upon selecting the Bolts style, the following dialog may display,
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

prompting you to save the changes to the Singleparts style. Press the
check button to continue with the Bolts style settings.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

7 Set the parameters for the Bolts style in the Posflag Definition dialog as
seen below. Then, click the check button to apply the settings.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 293 Positioning and Material Takeoffs


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Positioning and Material Takeoffs


Lesson 1: Positioning the Model

294
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
Lesson 1: Positioning the Model

 Exercise 3: Position the Model


1 Using the Display Class command, turn off the Bolt and HD Bolts Class.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

2 With the ProSteel Positionflags and Positioning dialog still open, select the
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Steel Positioning tab and then click on the Process Automatic Positioning
for all Parts with Given Settings icon.

Note: Click the check button when prompted to save changes for the Bolts
style.
3 Window select the entire model.
The system will begin the positioning process and when complete will
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

display the ProSteel Positioning: Result Single Part dialog, as shown below.
This serves as a visual check on what Singleparts were positioned. Its
contents are not editable.

Feb-12 295 Positioning and Material Takeoffs


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Positioning the Model
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

4 Click the check mark in the ProSteel Positioning: Results Single Parts
dialog. The ProSteel Positioning: Result Groups dialog will appear on
screen.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

5 Click the check mark to complete the process and allow positioning to
apply the sorting and comparison options.
6 Once the system returns us to our model, we will view the PS Properties of
an item. Pick the column located at coordinate A1 and right-click to get the
PS Properties from the context menu.
7 Access the Data page and note the Pos. No. field. Switch to the Group Data
tab and note the Pos. No. field. One position number is for the part and
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

the other is for the group. Also, note that the positioning has also counted
how many of this part and the group exist in the model. After applying the
comparison options, the system now knows that this model has two
groups that are exactly alike (column assemblies at A1 and B1).

Positioning and Material Takeoffs 296 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 2: Creating an External Parts List

Lesson 2: Creating an External Parts List


In this section, you will learn how to create a parts list, edit the parts list data and
format, and generate the actual report.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

 Exercise 1: Create the Parts List


1 Open the Partlist Creation dialog by selecting the main menu item
ProStructures 3D > Additions > Create Partlist Database. In the Partlist
Creation dialog, set the parameters as follows:
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 297 Positioning and Material Takeoffs


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 2: Creating an External Parts List

Descriptions of the fields in the above dialog are provided in the table below:

Name Description
Selection Types Allows you to select the parts for which a parts list is to be created.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

3D parts: means that you select the parts from the work frame.

2D positions flags: means that the parts lists will be deducted from the position flags of
a detailed workshop drawing. From modified 2D drawings you can generate new bills of
materials.

Options Verify position number: only those selected parts will be taken over into the parts lists
that have a valid position number.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Only Group Parts: only those selected parts will be taken over into the parts lists that
are assigned to a group.

Only Selected parts: Only selected parts are written to the partslist. If disabled, then the
complete groups of the selected parts are written to the parts list.

Create Group record: Group records are created for all complete groups that are
selected. Otherwise, no group records are written into the parts list.

If Start Parts List is clicked, parts list processing is loaded immediately after creation of
Student: Mariano Tomasino

parts list file by means of this file.

Calculate NC Cut Angles: Defines cut angles for generation of a NC file that can be read
by a NC machine to fabricate a section.

Straight End at front: Turns the NC-data so an eventual straight End is at front.

With Welds: Adds weld data into parts list.

Combine Welds: Combines all welds of same style and thickness into one entry.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Bolts If Bolts without Position Number is clicked, bolts will be included in the parts lists, even
if they have no position number. Washers Extra, Nuts Extra, Safety Washers Extra,
Tapered Washers Extra means that the additional parts for the bolts are separately
specified in the list of materials.

Output File The file for the list of materials is stored in the file displayed in the Name field, for
example, in the ‘XBASE format’.

By pressing the File button you can set the directory in the same manner as you use to
do under Windows.

With Bolts By pressing this button, you start part selection. The selected bolts will be considered as
well.

Positioning and Material Takeoffs 298 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 2: Creating an External Parts List

Name Description
Without Bolts By pressing this button, you start part selection. Bolts will not be considered, even
though they have been selected.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Mounting List By pressing this button, you start part selection. Only the main parts of groups including
bolts will be considered.

2 Select the Enables Selection of Data icon in the Output File section of the
Partlist Creation dialog and name the database you want to create.

Hint: It is recommended that you name the database the same name as the
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

model. In this instance, name the database TRNMODEL.MDB.


3 Select the Creates a Partlist without Bolts icon in the Partlist Creation
dialog.
4 When prompted to: “Select all parts to add in bill of material, RETURN for
all Shift+ESC for Filter” and “Select Objects”, key in All at the command
prompt and then press Enter. You can also window select the entire
model, or right-click, or simply press Enter.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

All parts will be selected and the process will begin. When the data is read,
all parts that were written to the database file will be “turned off” in the
model as a checking step. You can use the ProSteel Regen command to
bring all items back on screen.

 Exercise 2: Edit the Parts List Data and Format


1 Open the ProStructures Partlist dialog by selecting the main menu item
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

ProStructures 3D > Additions > Create Partlist from Database.

Feb-12 299 Positioning and Material Takeoffs


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 2: Creating an External Parts List
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

2 Select File > Open in the ProStructures Partlist dialog. Load the
TRNMODEL.MBD database.

Hint: The location will be C:\Program Files\Bentley\ProStructures\V8i_S3\


AutoCAD20xx\Localised\English\Partlist.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

The Part list Processing dialog will be propagated as shown below with
possibly unsorted data from the parts list. In the list, each part is stored
individually, but a combination of equal positions will be carried out at the
time of printout. You can open several files at the same time. The opened
files will be displayed in the list Act Database on the left side of the dialog.
By clicking a file name, the file will be your current work file. The parts
contained in the work file are displayed on the right side of the dialog. The
list of parts gives a survey of the entries. By clicking an entry twice, within
the right hand column, another dialog will be displayed which contains all
data available with respect to the entry concerned.
This data can be processed in the dialog. When closing the dialog, they are
imported, and IMMEDIATELY stored in the file. End the data recorded by
clicking OK.

Positioning and Material Takeoffs 300 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 2: Creating an External Parts List
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Note: You are modifying "live" data. Any changes you make will reflect in the
report and will not back update the model.
3 Select the menu item Settings > Edit Part List Definition from the
ProStructures Partlist dialog.
4 When the file selection dialog appears, open the FREEPARTS.LST file.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

This will load the Designer window for the specific report that you
selected. From here you can change the format, title, grouping of parts,
colours, fonts, rows, and columns etc. for each type of report. Experience
with report writer tools is required in order to generate the desired
formats needed by your company. Close this window as we will leave this
unedited in this exercise.
5 Select File > Exit to return to the ProStructures Partlist dialog.

Feb-12 301 Positioning and Material Takeoffs


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 2: Creating an External Parts List

 Exercise 3: Generate the Report


1 Select the menu item Delivery > Select SinglePart list from the
ProStructures Partlist dialog. When the dialog loads, select SingleParts.lst
from the list of reports and then press Open.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Note: If a message regarding the paper size should display, just continue with
the printing process.
2 The Print Options dialog shown below will display:
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Positioning and Material Takeoffs 302 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 2: Creating an External Parts List

3 From within the Print Options dialog, change the Direct To field to send
the report to a Preview. Press the Start button to begin the process and
display the report.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

4 Select the + Magnifying glass icon at the top to zoom in on the reports
content. Note how the parts are displayed in the report. When finished,
exit this report by pressing the Exit Preview icon at the top of the screen.
5 Execute the procedure again, this time choosing a different report format.
Note the display of the data.
6 Exit any reports still open and when you return to the ProStructures
Partlist dialog, select File > End to exit the database editor/report
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

generator.

Hint: Changes made in the model after the database is generated WILL NOT update
the database. The report should be re-run to capture the new or changed data.

Feb-12 303 Positioning and Material Takeoffs


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 3: Creating a drawing Parts List

Lesson 3: Creating a drawing Parts List


In this section, you will learn how to create a parts list that can be dropped
directly onto the model or 2D drawings & modify the partlist information to
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

display.

 Exercise 1: Create the Drawing Parts List


1 Select the Insert Drawing Partlist tool from ProStructures 3D > Additions >
Insert Drawing Partlist, or click on the Insert Drawing Partlist icon from the
Partlist and Export toolbar (also a fly-out from the Edit toolbar).
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

2 When prompt to select objects, type "all" and press ENTER.


The partlist will now be inserted wherever you click with your cursor.
Make sure the "Ortho" option is selected.
3 Once inserted, the dialog box appears. Set the first page as shown in the
graphic below.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

4 We will now create a completely new list by moving to the List Styles tab.
Under the Bentley folder, we will create a "Training" list using the Create
button.

Positioning and Material Takeoffs 304 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 3: Creating a drawing Parts List
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

5 Now move to the Layout tab and make sure the newly created list is
selected in the pull down field, then click the editing icon.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

6 The newly opened dialog will let us personalise the layout of this partlist.
Set values in the lower area as shown in the graphic below.

Feb-12 305 Positioning and Material Takeoffs


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 3: Creating a drawing Parts List
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Descriptions of the fields in the above dialog are provided in the table below:

Name Description
Style name The name of the current style; all modifications are related to this style.

Display List Here, you see an overview of all displayed columns of the parts list. They are displayed
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

in this order from the left to the right in the drawing parts list.

Click on this button to modify the line selected in the display list (parts list column).

Click on this button to add a new line (parts list column) to the end of the list.

Click on this button to add a new line (parts list column) in front of the highlighted line.

Click on this button to delete the selected line (parts list column) from the list.

Click on this button to open the footer notes and extra information dialogbox.

The arrow buttons are used to move items up or down the list if required.

Positioning and Material Takeoffs 306 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 3: Creating a drawing Parts List

Name Description
Values section Text Size: Determines the text size in drawing units at a scale 1:1

Height Scaling: Increases the height of the lines spacing by this factor. Depending on the
text style, the readability of the parts list is increased
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Left Margin: Distance of the text to the left margin at left-justified insertion.

Right Margin: Distance of the text to the right margin at right-justified insertion.

Offset: Distance of the part group position number entries vs the group position
number.

Rotation: Rotation of the whole list by the indicated degrees


Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Block Size: Indicates after how many lines of text a horizontal line has to be inserted.
This only serves for a clearer overview.

Header: Additional title to place on the very top of the list.

Colour Fields Here you control the colours for various parts of the table.

Move Up: If this field is checked, the list is running from the bottom to the top, i. e. the
column headers are below.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Divide Groups: At group lists, the groups are divided by horizontal lines. The settings
under 'Block Size' don't have any influence in this case.

Align Numbers at right: All numerical values are aligned to the right margin

Fill remaining with zero: All numerical values are filled up with zeros according to the
indicated format length and digits after the decimal point.

Header: The header of the list is used

Text Style: Select the desired text style. Please refer to the AutoCAD manual for more
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

detailed information about AutoCAD text styles.

Sort: Depending on the field selected here, the output is sorted in rising order from the
column header onward.

Invert: Causes a sorting in descending order from the column header onward.

Use Prefix: At sorting, the entries are separated in prefix and number and then sorted
separately

Feb-12 307 Positioning and Material Takeoffs


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 3: Creating a drawing Parts List

7 Use the Add New Line icon to open up the Column settings dialog.
Complete the partlist information for each field as shown in the following
image:
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Positioning and Material Takeoffs 308 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 3: Creating a drawing Parts List

Descriptions of the fields in the Column settings dialog are provided in the table
below:

Name Description
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Field Name Select (double-click) the desired field from the data fields.

Name1 The name of the column header respective to the first name if an entry has been
indicated in input field Name2 as well. There are two rows are available altogether.

Name2 The second name of column header.

Length Enter the desired column width in text signs. The exact column width depends on the
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

selected text style.

Dec. Point The number of desired positions after the decimal point.

Text Size Enter the text size of the column. If you have entered the value 0, the general text size
of the list style is used.

Colour Enter the colour of the column text (colour number). If you have entered the value -1,
the text colour of the list style is used.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Position Enter the alignment of the column: Left, Center, Right or Automatic. If Automatic has
been selected, all texts are aligned to the left and all digits are aligned to the right.

Units Enter the unit format Metric, Imperial or Automatic. If Automatic has been selected, the
default units of the drawing are used.

8 Now we will look at the footer, using the Footer icon.


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

From here we can control the footer text, its colour, size, alignment, and
so forth.
We can also use a factor value to calculate percentage additions.
It is also possible from here to modify the colour and prefix of the header
of group, sub-group and assembly listings.

Feb-12 309 Positioning and Material Takeoffs


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 3: Creating a drawing Parts List

Descriptions of the fields in the above dialog are provided in the table below:

Name Description
Footer Enter the desired foot lines. You can use pre-defined variables as well. The following
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

variables are available as foot lines:

$(N) The number of lines is indicated.

$(F) Multiplication factor addition in %

$(L) Overall length of all parts without addition

$(LF) Overall length of all parts with addition


Company: Seibo Ingeniería

$(W) Overall weight of all parts without addition

$(WF) Overall weight of all parts with addition

$(P) Overall area to be painted of all parts without addition

$(PF) Overall area to be painted of all parts with addition

Addition Percentage by which the determined values have to be increased. These increased
values can be output by means of the variable $(?F).
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Dec. Point. The number of desired positions after the decimal point.

Offset The distance to the corresponding margin.

Colour Enter the colour of the text (colour number). If you have entered the value -1, the text
colour of the list style is used.

Position Enter the alignment of the text: Left, Center, Right or Automatic. If Automatic has been
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

selected, all texts are aligned to the left and all digits are aligned to the right.

Units Enter the unit format Metric, Imperial or Automatic. If Automatic has been selected, the
default units of the drawing are used.

Group Row In the Prefix input field, you can indicate a prefix for the position numbers of group
lines. In the Colour input field you can specify the colour of the group line. If the value
of -1 has been indicated here, the normal text colour will be used. These settings can be
made separately for groups, subgroups and assemblies.

Positioning and Material Takeoffs 310 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Module Summary

Module Summary
You are now able to:
• Set the defaults for Positioning
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

• Define the Position Flags


• Position the Model
• Create a parts list
• Edit the parts list data and format
• Generate the actual report
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 311 Positioning and Material Takeoffs


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Module Summary

312 Positioning and Material Takeoffs


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
Detail Center
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Module Overview
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Now that the modelling process is complete, you can begin the process of
creating the frame deliverable drawings. The entire process is automated through
the ProSteel DetailCenter.

Note: Do not confuse the term 2D or DetailCenter with the process of steel detailing.
All 2D output is controlled from within this function. Think of this as the
"Drawing Production Centre".
Student: Mariano Tomasino

This module will focus on the format and use of the DetailCenter. You will briefly
touch on the specifics of the detail styles used to generate the desired results. You
will learn what comprises the DetailCenter and how to use it to produce your
engineering drawings. You will also learn how to use the DetailCenter to produce
Manual or Custom details. The true power of the DetailCenter is evident when
you use the DetailCenter to correct your existing 2D details after a change is made
in the model.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

There are four lessons in this module. Each lesson begins with a list of objectives
that define the information that you will learn in that lesson. A number of
exercises are provided in each lesson that are designed to teach you the topics
listed in the Objectives section at the start of each lesson.

Warning: It is recommended that you start the 3D model with a template file (*.dwt)
containing the required "measurement" variable setting, "units" setting, Text
styles, Dimension style, Display classes, Part families, Area classes, and so forth.
For 2D drawing generation, ProSteel takes all required text and dimension styles
specified in the DetailStyle from the model and brings them over to the 2D
drawing. The template file (*.dwt) used for 2D drawings should be free of text and
dimension styles except for the border/drawing frame text styles to avoid
erroneous results.

Feb-12 313 Detail Center

Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated


Module Prerequisites

Module Prerequisites
This course is designed for the experienced user of ProSteel who understands and
is capable of modeling, grouping, adding Part Families, Part Descriptions, and
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

positioning with ProSteel. As such the participant should have a clear


understanding of the usage of AutoCAD and the Windows operating system.

Module Objectives
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

• Learn how to load the DetailCenter


• Learn the basic design of the DetailCenter
• Learn how to load a detail style to begin the process of detailing our structure
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Detail Center 314 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre

Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre


 Exercise 1: Loading the Detail Centre
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

In this exercise you will learn how to load the DetailCenter.


1 Open the example model TRNMODEL.dwg, provided with the datasets.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

2 Load the DetailCenter (ProStructures 3D > 2D > DetailCenter).


3 You will be asked to select the Detailing Mode. Select DetailCenter
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Standard from the dialog list and then click the check mark to accept the
selection.

4 This will load the DetailCenter and display the components from the
model, as well as the frames that were generated when you created the
Workframes.

Feb-12 315 Detail Center


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

What is the DetailCenter?


Student: Mariano Tomasino

In ProSteel, users control the complete 2D drawing and plan generation from
within the DetailCenter - from a first overview of the components to the
workshop drawing with multiple changes and manipulations. Think of the
DetailCenter as a program within the program because it offers many more
possibilities and options than one can see at first glance.

When you open the DetailCenter for the first time, you will see a clearly organized
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

dialog box with just a few setting options. You really do not need anything else at
this point if you have already customized the program because right now, you
want to derive your workshop plans from the model. However, if you want to, you
can push into the innermost depths of the drawing derivation at any time. You can
set a great variety of options; request information; and monitor and check
drawings. The philosophy behind this development is that you should be able to
obtain the same result in a variety of different ways, that you can change many
elements and options - but that you do not have to. The highest possible level of
flexibility for you as the user during the final phase of the design - that is the
DetailCenter.

In Exercise 2, you will learn the lay of the land in the DetailCenter.

Level 1: The Parts Tab Overview

Detail Center 316 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre

Here you will obtain an overview of the parts of the model and their functional
associations and relationships. You can view construction groups, single parts or
whole areas of the model - all clearly structured in a tree format. This is the place
where you manage and change detail styles and link your components with these
styles as well as manage the modification mechanism. In addition, the
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

DetailCenter Express! is launched from here.

Under the Parts tab there are three display areas:


Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

1 The first window is located directly below the icons and is used for
informational purposes only. Information cannot be changed or edited in
this display and no additional functions can be accessed from this area.
2 The second window is the DetailStyles window. This window lists all of the
DetailStyles currently loaded. From here DetailStyles can be created,
loaded, copied or saved with a right-click within the window and selecting
the appropriate action. The DetailStyles are stored here within folders
called “themes”. These can be used to sort DetailStyles by client, project,
and so forth.
3 The last window is a list of all the active model’s elements. It is by the
action of drag and drop from this window onto the appropriate DetailStyle
that creating the 2D drawings begins. The sorting, mentioned above, can

Feb-12 317 Detail Center


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre

be done to the items displayed in this window so that assigning them to


DetailStyles becomes faster and easier. Also with a right-click in this
window, you can update and open any 2D drawings that have been
created.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

The Icons are as follows:

The icons on the Parts tab allow you to control the information displayed below in
various ways. Each one serves a specific function and will be covered in turn.
What is important to note at this point is that even though some icons may
appear to be identical on different tabs, each icon serves only the tab it has been
placed onto. For example, the icon of the wrench on one tab may not offer the
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

same options as the icon of the wrench on another tab. Or, the sorting on one tab
may be different from the sorting on another tab.

The first icon on the Parts tab is used to right-click the selected element(s)
and move it (them) along to the next stage (tab). The chosen item(s) should first
have a DetailStyle assigned to it (them) before this option is used.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

The first icon on the first three tabs, Parts, Views and Insert, may look different
but each performs the same function. A drag and drop of an item on it will move
it to the next stage (tab).

The recursive icon allows for all parent and child elements to be selected at
the same time in the same tree like structure.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

For example, if items were sorted showing the assembly structures, elements
making up the assembly would be listed as child elements. With recursive turned
on when the assembly is chosen, the individual elements forming the assembly
would also be selected.

Note: This feature should be disabled when assigning detail styles to different
elements so that single parts do not receive the same style for dimensioning as
the assembled components do.

Detail Center 318 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre

The recursive icon is available on the first three tabs and each work the same way;
however, each tab can have its recursive option set on or off individually.

The Sorting icon controls how the list of elements from the model is
displayed. When this icon is used, a dialog appears which allows you to define
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

how you would like the list sorted.


Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Within this dialog you can first choose between PS Standard and User Defined.
The PS3D standard option is necessary to be able to select views and plans, as
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

User Defined methods will not list these.

Once the initial display type has been chosen, if User Defined was selected, then
the window on the left hand side near the top becomes available and how items
are sorted can be selected.

The window to the right and the arrows directly below are used to control which
methods for sorting are made available and in which order they are performed if
more than one method is selected.

The filters of this dialog box allow you to further limit the items displayed by
selecting and setting up arguments that must be met in order to be displayed.

Two separate filters can be set up and used if required.

Feb-12 319 Detail Center


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre

The final part of this dialog allows for optional settings to be defined. Here users
can change the Sort Order to ascending or descending methods, or select no
sorting at all.

The option for Show entries only 1x is also available. This option will list identical
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

members only once.

New per group will list identical members once per group if Show entries only 1x
is on and as many times as created in each group if this option is not on.

The Group-Display drop down box allows for the selection to display only parts,
only groups (in a tree structure), or both parts and groups together.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

With Pre-Sort will add descriptions as a parent heading and sort items below
these parent headings.

The last setting is No empty folder, which simply hides any folder with nothing in
it.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Probably the best user method for sorting the list is by Part Descriptions or Part
Families. Keep in mind however that the display type should be set back to PS
Standard in order to process anchor plans, elevations (or sections) and plans. Also
you will need to keep an eye on whether group or single 'group-display' has been
set when using user defined settings.

The wrench icon is for settings. When this icon is selected, a dialog box will
appear with different settings for you to select from.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

The Overwrite protection option locks drawings and stops any updates from being
done to them. This option should not be enabled unless you are certain that the
drawings being produced will be to the specifications required and will not need
to be modified.

Detail Center 320 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre

The Hide in part list option simply hides any item placed onto a DetailStyle.
Reopening the DetailCenter will refresh the list showing all elements again
including those that were hidden using this option.

Take over into view list is not a required option, but does provide a means of
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

moving items from the Parts tab to the Views tab quickly and efficiently. With this
option enabled, any element placed onto a DetailStyle will automatically be taken
over to the Views tab saving you from having to drag and drop to the top left icon
for processing.

In the final section of this dialog box are two options: one is for Restore manual
changes if updated, and the other is Also delete dimensions/labels. It is
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

recommended that these options always be turned on. What happens if they are
not turned on is that any manual changes or deletions to the 2D drawing will be
lost when an update is done. With these checked, all manual changes would be
saved even after an update to the drawing has been performed.

This icon will reread all the information from the model and repopulate the
display window at the bottom of the Parts tab. It is the equivalent of closing and
Student: Mariano Tomasino

reopening the DetailCenter. It is important to remember however that it will read


the information from the window that currently has focus and so it is important
that when using this option, the window with the model is the one currently open
and selected.

This icon will open up the DetailCenter Express. It is used for automating the
process of 2D drawing creation. This process involves several pages of information
being answered, external templates being made and the creation of specific
control files.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Level 2: The Views Tab Overview

Feb-12 321 Detail Center


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Once a DetailStyle is assigned in the parts tab and the item brought over from
there (either automatically or manually), it will appear in this tab.

The Views tab's main purpose is to allow you to preview the drawings in a
WYSIWYG mode to adjust the DetailStyles assigned to them, meaning DetailStyle
adjustments can be made and seen dynamically. This way, users can be sure the
DetailStyle is set up properly prior to inserting the selected item into a 2D
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

drawing.

Note: The preview should never be saved as a 2D drawing since it is not directly linked
to the model and cannot be updated if changes are made in the model.

The Icons

The icons shown above are: 2D; Recursive; Sorting; Options; and Custom view.

The 2D icon will take any items which are dragged and dropped on it to the
next stage. At this point these items should be available under the Insert tab.

The Recursive icon works in exactly the same fashion as it did under the
Parts tab. However it will affect only items under the current tab.

Detail Center 322 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre

The Sorting icon works in exactly the same fashion as it did under the Parts
tab. However it will affect only items under the current tab.

The Options icon brings up the options available at this point. In this case a
small dialog box appears with only one option, Hide part in model. This will hide
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

the part in the model once it has been moved to the Insert tab.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The Custom View icon allows for the creation of a custom detail view taken
from the model that can include position flags and weld mark symbols. The
creation of these views will be explained in more detail in a different section.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

The Display Windows

Feb-12 323 Detail Center


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

When you right-click in the display window on a part, group or view, a small menu
will appear. From here the options Preview and Edit DetailStyle are available.
These are the primary options and the reason for this tab.

In addition to these options, a user can create Additional Views and Display Info.

Additional Views allows for the creation of a custom detail view taken from the
model that can include position flags and weld mark symbols. The creation of
these views will be explained in more detail in a different section.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

The Display Info option simply opens another window with all the information
about the selected item. It is for informational purposes only.

The first option is Create 2D. When using this it is the same as the drag and drop
of selected items onto the 2D icon at the top left in that it will move the selected
items over to the Insert tab.

Level 3: The Insert Tab (Detail Block) Overview


The Insert tab is where all the parts, groups and views get placed into 2D
drawings.

Detail Center 324 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre

The first step is to start and save a new drawing. Then, you will select the items to
be placed in this drawing and drag and drop them on the icon in the top left
corner. The next step is to place the 2D Detail within the new drawing. Once
finished, save the drawing again and process the same way a drawing is normally
processed under AutoCAD.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

The Icons

The icons shown above are: Drag and Drop; Recursive; Sorting; Options; Reload;
Insert Assistant; and Exchange.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

The Drag and Drop icon lets you indicate where the files should be
dragged and dropped into the drawing.

The Recursive icon works in exactly the same fashion as it did under the
Parts tab. However it will affect only items under the current tab.

The Sorting icon works in exactly the same fashion as it did under the Parts
tab. However it will affect only items under the current tab.

Feb-12 325 Detail Center


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre

The Options icon brings up the available options at this point. In this case a
small dialog box appears with two options.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The first option will remove the part from the list once it has been placed into a
2D drawing.

The second option determines whether US Mark Numbering will be used or not.
The fields below the second option are informational only.

The Reloads icon reloads all the detail blocks and updates the display
Student: Mariano Tomasino

window.

The Insert Assistant tool can be used to automatically insert items onto
multiple drawings. This requires a certain amount of setup and is not covered in
the basic course.

The Exchange icon opens a dialog box which lets you exchange or edit a detail
block.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

The Display Windows

Detail Center 326 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre

There are three windows under the Insert tab. Each window is described below.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

1 The first window is informational only and no addition functions exist from
here.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

2 The second window displays a folder view. Each folder represents a 3D


model that has been prepared for 2D insertion. The name of the folders
should be the same as the names of the 3D dwg files containing the
models. A right-click in this window will allow you to delete a folder or
'detail dictionary' completely.
3 The third window displays everything contained within the folder that has
been selected in the above window. If no folders are selected then this
window will show no elements.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

A right-click in the third window will bring up a small drop-down menu. From
there you get four choices (depending on the highlighted element when the right-
click is done).

Insert 2D will allow you to directly insert the selected object(s) into the 2D
drawing without the need to drag and drop to the icon in the top left hand corner.

Feb-12 327 Detail Center


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre

Preview will bring up a preview of what the detail block is. This is not the 2D dwg
and should not be saved but rather discarded. The block should be inserted using
the Insert 2D process into a 2D drawing and then saved.

Delete entry from detail library will remove the selected entries so that they no
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

longer are available in the window for selection. If they need to be inserted into a
drawing in the future then you will have to go back to at least the view tab if not
further and bring them over to the Insert tab once more.

Display Info opens a window containing information about the particular detail
block. The window that opens is informational only.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The Settings Tab

The Settings tab is dedicated to the global behavioural settings of the


DetailCenter, including templates and configuration files.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Colour Coding throughout the tabs

Detail Center 328 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre

• GREY: Parts not processed


• BLUE: The detail block of the part was created; it is not inserted in the 2D
drawing and does not need updating.
• YELLOW: The detail block of the part was created; it is not inserted in the 2D
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

drawing and it needs updating.


• GREEN: The detail block of the part was created; it is inserted in the 2D
drawing and it does not need updating.
• RED: The detail block of the part was created; it is inserted in the 2D drawing
and it needs updating.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Information Window

There is also an information window, which will be displayed if you right-click on


one of the components listed in the Parts tab list and select Display Info. This
information window is assigned to all three work levels and shows the current
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 329 Detail Center


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre

status of the entry. Depending on the list, this window displays the name and type
of the part, data of detailing, insertion location, current status, and much more.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Context Menu

Detail Center 330 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre

A supplement to every level is a level-specific Context Menu accessible through


the right mouse button, which lists only those functions that are significant to the
respective list. This option offers the fastest way to access a command.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Detail Styles
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

The detail styles are the cornerstone of the entire detailing process. They describe
how a part is to look as a workshop detail or how the model is to appear as an
overview. The content of the styles is described in some detail in the next lesson.

Feb-12 331 Detail Center


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre

Preview
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The detailing of a selected part can be previewed from within the view's overview
Student: Mariano Tomasino

or directly from within the model. This will create a new AutoCAD temp dwg file
displaying the exact result of the detail style settings applied to this part, group,
and view. The drawing shows how the part, group, and view will be detailed. Since
you can now open this part's detail style, you can track the effects of different
style settings in real time. You call this fine-tuning of the detail style. If you open
the preview for another part you do not have to close this window first. The
content is updated automatically.
1 Open the DetailCenter Part Setting dialog (Part tab > Press the
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

DetailCenter Settings icon).


2 Set the parameter values as shown below.

3 When finished, click the check mark to close the settings dialog.

 Exercise 3: Loading a Detail Style

Detail Center 332 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre

In this exercise, you learn how to load a detail style in order to begin the detailing
process. You will also briefly look at the specifics of the detail style itself.
1 From within the Parts tab of the DetailCenter in the DetailStyles window,
right-click to display the Context menu.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

2 From the context menu, select Load/Save > Load Style(s). When the dialog
appears to load a style, select the S3 Marking (Elevations) style. This will
load the style into the DetailCenter under its original theme or currently
selected theme, depending on the selection made in this dialog.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

3 Now that the S3 Marking (Elevations) style is loaded you will briefly review
its content. This can be done by either double-clicking the style name or
highlighting the style and then right clicking the mouse and selecting Edit
DetailStyle from the context menu.
4 Open the S3 Marking (Elevations) style and review the contents of this
style.

Feb-12 333 Detail Center


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Loading and Reviewing the 2D Detail Centre

The detailing style offers you some decisive influence over the style of the
detailing because it is here that you determine what is to be dimensioned, how to
dimension it, what texts to include, whether to attach position flags, and so much
more. Over 200 parameters are available to specify the appearance of your
drawing.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

You can save and load these styles individually and even import or export them
from third parties. Since it is possible to manage entire parameter records you can
create specific styles for specific detailing tasks (e.g., for overviews, workshop
plans, life-sized displays, etc.) and just select them later. Your main task consists of
defining the suitable styles once. The program offers the option to immediately
check each change using a preview feature until details look exactly like you want
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

them to be.

Note: Understand that creating a detail style can take some time and should not be
rushed. Use the Preview function to verify the settings. Allow sufficient time to
create the style for your desired output. In the end, time spent up front will pay
off in quick time saving drawing production.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Saving Styles

Normally, the detailing styles are saved together with the drawing. This means
that you always have to save your model if the modifications of detailing styles
are to be kept permanently. There is, however, the possibility to write a detailing
style as a file on the hard drive and to re-import it from there. This permits you to
exchange, update or even transfer the detailing styles of different models.
Furthermore, you can create a collection of detailing styles, and in the model use
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

only a selection of those styles that are required for that moment.

General Info

If you double-click on a detail style, a dialog with several tabs displays in which
the individual parameters are organized according to different areas. Some of the
tabs have tabs themselves, which are used for special settings. These are usually
infrequently used settings and are thus removed by a few extra mouse clicks. You
do not have to take care to close all of these dialogs because the program closes
them automatically when you select a different tab.

Detail Center 334 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 2: Assigning a View to a Style and Creating a 2D Deliverable Drawing

Lesson 2: Assigning a View to a Style and Creating a 2D


Deliverable Drawing
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Objectives
The objectives of this lesson are as follows:
• Learn how to assign a view to a detail style.
• Learn how to process a view through the DetailCenter.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

• Further use the Multiple Document Interface to create your "deliverable"


drawing.
• Complete the process by saving your drawing and your model, and reviewing
the display of the DetailCenter and using it to determine the status of a view.

 Exercise 1: Assigning a view to a Detail Style

In this exercise, you will learn how to assign the view to the detail style.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

1 From within the DetailCenter Parts tab, select the Bentley_Y_1 view. With
the view highlighted, drag and drop the view onto the S3 Marking
(Elevations) style. The View in the Parts tab will have a check mark next to
it. This is your signal that the view has been assigned to a style.
2 Pick on the view Bentley_Y_1 and then with the arrow on the highlighted
frame name, right-click and access the context menu. From within the
context menu, select Display Info. This will load the information dialog and
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

you will see the style named that has been applied to the frame.

3 Close dialog.

Feb-12 335 Detail Center


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 2: Assigning a View to a Style and Creating a 2D Deliverable Drawing

 Exercise 2: Processing the view through the Detail Centre

In this exercise, you will learn how to process the view Bentley_Y_1 through the
DetailCenter.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

1 From within the DetailCenter, select the Views tab. When the display
changes to the contents of the Views tab you will see the Bentley_Y_1
view in the current views section of the tab.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

2 At this point you can preview the results of the S3 Marking (Elevations)
detail style. Highlight the Bentley_Y_1 view then right-click the mouse to
access the context menu. From the menu select Preview. This will open
the preview of the detail.

Hint: At this time you can open the detail style used to create the view by selecting
“Edit Style” from the context menu you see when you right-click on the
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

selected view. Make changes to the style and watch as the changes update in
the created view. This serves as a great construction tool when defining detail
styles.
3 Before continuing through the process you must close the preview
window. To do this, press the X in the corner of the Preview window and
when prompted to save the contents of the preview, press No.
4 The next step in the detailing process is to pass the view onto the Insert
tab and allow ProSteel to process the view into an intelligent block. Back in
the Views tab of the DetailCenter you can either drag and drop the
Bentley_Y_1 view onto the Start detailing of selected Parts button or
highlight the Bentley_Y_1 view and right click the mouse button and then
select Create 2D form the sub menu. The system will take a moment to
process the view through the DetailCenter.

Detail Center 336 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 2: Assigning a View to a Style and Creating a 2D Deliverable Drawing

5 Switch to the Insert tab of the DetailCenter. In the section labelled Detail
directory pick the TRNMODEL listed. This will refresh the view and in the
lower half of the tab labelled Detail Blocks, your Bentley_Y_1 view will
appear. At this point the view is ready to insert into a deliverable drawing.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

 Exercise 3: Preparing the Deliverable Drawing to Accept your Detail Block

In this exercise, you learn how to create a new "deliverable" drawing and insert a
border.
1 From the AutoCAD menu select File > New.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

When the AutoCAD New dialog displays, browse and select the template file
Training.dwt from the Templates folder. Then click Open.

Feb-12 337 Detail Center


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 2: Assigning a View to a Style and Creating a 2D Deliverable Drawing

2 After the new drawing is created, browse to the Detail folder and save the
drawing as TRNDET1.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

3 You will not be able to insert the detail into the new drawing until it has a
Student: Mariano Tomasino

valid drawing name, as the name is linked to the item in the 3D model.
ProSteel will warn you that the drawing has not been saved.

Note: We have used a provided dwt file to create our 2D drawing. but you can
use your own company standards with title blocks included either in
paperspace or modelspace.

 Exercise 4: Inserting your View Detail into your Deliverable Drawing


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

In this exercise you will learn how to insert the view into your drawing, save the
view and model, and review the 2D DetailCenter settings.
1 From the DetailCenter Insert tab, select the required version of the
Bentley_Y_1 view, as each time you process the view you will create a new
date and time stamped version.
2 Make the 2D drawing created in the previous exercise your current
drawing. Then either drag and drop the view name onto the Insert Detail
Block button located at the top of the tab or highlight the required view
then right mouse click and select Insert 2D from the sub menu. After doing
this, a check mark will appear beside the view.

Detail Center 338 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 2: Assigning a View to a Style and Creating a 2D Deliverable Drawing
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The block will appear as a ghost image in the drawing.


3 Use the mouse to position the block in the desired position, then left-click
Student: Mariano Tomasino

to place it in the drawing. When finished the view should be in the


drawing and appear similar to the figure below.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 339 Detail Center


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 2: Assigning a View to a Style and Creating a 2D Deliverable Drawing

Note: The insert position can be set within the DetailStyle.


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

4 Save the detail sheet, then go back to the 3D dwg (TRNMODEL) and save it
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

as well.
5 Switch back to the Parts tab of the DetailCenter. Reload the model into the
DetailCenter using the Reload icon. Note that the Bentley_Y_1 view is now
highlighted in green. This denotes that the view has been processed,
resides in a drawing, and is up to date.
6 Within the Parts tab, highlight the Bentley_Y_1 view then right-click to
access the context menu. From within the context menu pick Display Info.

Detail Center 340 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 2: Assigning a View to a Style and Creating a 2D Deliverable Drawing

Note how the information dialog for the view now contains the drawing
that the detail resides on as well as the path.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

 Exercise 5: Inserting a Detail into a Drawing Sheet


Student: Mariano Tomasino

In this exercise you will add a component detail from your model to a drawing
sheet.
1 From the 2D DetailCenter Parts tab, confirm that the S3 Beams view
DetailStyle has been loaded. If it has not, right mouse click to display the
context menu. From the context menu, select Load Style(s). When the
dialog appears, select the S3 Beams view style. This will load the style into
the DetailCenter.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 341 Detail Center


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 2: Assigning a View to a Style and Creating a 2D Deliverable Drawing

2 From within the model select the beam that is located on gridline 1. Right
mouse click and select PS Search/Select Single Part. This will highlight the
part in the component list.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Detail Center 342 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 2: Assigning a View to a Style and Creating a 2D Deliverable Drawing

3 Make sure you select the top level (the Group item) from the list.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

4 From within the DetailCenter Parts tab, select the highlighted component
and drag and drop it onto the S3 Beams view style. The component will
have a check mark next to it. This is your signal that the component has
been assigned to a style.
5 From within the DetailCenter, select the Views tab. When the display
changes to the contents of the Views tab you will see the component in
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

the current views section of the tab.

6 At this point you can preview the results of the S3 Beams view detail style.
Highlight the component, then right-click to access the context menu.
From the menu select Preview. This will invoke the preview of the detail.
7 Close the preview window. When prompted to save the contents of the
preview, press NO.

Feb-12 343 Detail Center


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 2: Assigning a View to a Style and Creating a 2D Deliverable Drawing

8 The next step in the detailing process is to switch to the Insert tab and
allow ProSteel to process the view into an intelligent block. Back in the
Views tab of the DetailCenter, either drag and drop the component view
onto the Create Detail Blocks button or right mouse click and select Create
2D from the sub menu. The system will take a moment to process the view
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

through the DetailCenter.


9 Switch to the Insert tab of the DetailCenter. Under the DetailDirectory
node, select the TRNMODEL listed. This will refresh the view and in the
lower half of the tab under the Detail Blocks node, your component will
appear. At this point the view is ready to insert into a deliverable drawing.
10 Start a New Blank Drawing using the Training.dwt template and save it as
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

TRNDET2 under the Detail folder.


11 From within the Insert tab of the DetailCenter, select the required date
and time stamped version of component view. You can drag and drop the
view name onto the Insert Detail Block button located at the top of the
tab, or you can right-click and select insert 2D from the sub menu.
12 The block will appear as a ghost image in the drawing. Use the mouse to
position the block into the desired position, then left-click to place the
Student: Mariano Tomasino

block in the drawing.


13 Save the detail sheet. Using the window menu, select the TRNMODEL.
When this becomes active, save it as well.
14 Switch back to the Parts tab of the DetailCenter and reload the model.
Note that the object is now highlighted in green if US-Mark Numbering
was not used. If it was used, the object is now highlighted in red. If green,
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

this denotes that the view has been processed, and now resides in a
drawing. If red, we need to update the 2D, which will then get the new
Mark created at the moment of insertion. This step will be shown further
in this module.
15 In the Parts tab, highlight the object, then right-click to access the context
menu. Select Display Info. Note how the information dialog for the view
now contains the drawing that the detail resides on as well as the path.

Detail Center 344 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson3: Modifying the Model and Automatically Updating the Detail Drawings

Lesson3: Modifying the Model and Automatically Updating the


Detail Drawings
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Objectives
The objectives of this lesson are as follows:
• Learn how to use the power of the DetailCenter to update the details when
the model changes
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

 Exercise 1: Modifying the Model

In this exercise, you will modify the model and change a shape size.
1 Open TRNMODEL.DGN.
2 Window on front 530UB82 cross beam located at grid line 1, at the top of
the Bentley frame.
3 Pick the 530UB82 and edit the shape. Change the shape to a 610UB125.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

When the model updates, press the check mark to end the modification
process.
4 Reload the model into 2D DetailCenter. Note that the two views you
processed through the DetailCenter are now flagged in red. This means
that ProSteel has read the model file and knows that these items are
inserted in a detail sheet and that they no longer match the model.
5 To update the detail sheet where these blocks reside, select the two
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

blocks flagged red (use the CTRL key to make the multiple selection).
Right-click on one of the two blocks and when the context menu opens,
select Update 2D Drawing.
6 To check if the 2D detail has been changed, highlight the component, then
right click and from the context menu select Open 2D-drawing.
The drawing associated to this component will be displayed. Note that the
detail sheet now reflects the updates made to the model.
7 Save both the model and detail sheet and close the DetailCenter. Also
note that the modified components now appear in green because they
now reflect the model again.

Feb-12 345 Detail Center


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 5: Managing Moved and Renamed Files

Lesson 5: Managing Moved and Renamed Files

Objectives
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

The objectives of this lesson are as follows:


• Learn how to manually or automatically change the file locations due to files
being moved and renamed

The path and file name of detail blocks and detail drawings is saved into the
model which enables automatic updating. If for some reason you need to move
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

these files, you will need to update the detail database within the model. This can
be done manually or with the automated tools found in the DetailCenter.

When a part is passed from the Views tab of the DetailCenter to the Insert tab of
the DetailCenter, a detail block is created. This block is made up of two files, an
AutoCAD DWG file and a data (DAT) file. These files contain information about the
detail block and its creation. The data file is used during automatic updating; if it
Student: Mariano Tomasino

is not found, then automatic updating can be interrupted and not function
correctly.

When a part is inserted into a detail drawing, the drawing's name and file path are
stored within the detail database in the model and within the data file of the
detail block. If for some reason ProSteel cannot find the detail drawing, then
automatic updates of the details cannot be completed as ProSteel will not be able
to locate the detail drawing that needs to be updated.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

This section will show you how to update these file paths in the detail database.

Manual Path Changing


Manual path changing is very simple: you re-detail the parts to rewrite their
location in the detail database. This is not a very user friendly process as it
requires you to redo all the work you put in initially to create the details. However
the process is very simple, and if you do not feel confident in using the automated
tools then you can use this process.

To manually change the path, re-insert the detail into the new file.

Detail Center 346 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 5: Managing Moved and Renamed Files

Automatic Path Changing


The automated process involves checking the detail database for what ProSteel
refers to as file paths. The file path stored in the detail database enables cross-
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

referencing between the model and its detail files.

The RevisionCenter lets you look at these file names and paths and checks those
to find the actual detail drawings. Once an error is found you can then define a
new path or, in the case that you have renamed the file, you can also choose to
point the detail to a new drawing file.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

To access this feature, open the DetailCenter and click on the RevisionCenter
button.
Student: Mariano Tomasino

The RevisionCenter opens. In the Documents tab, you can see the inserted block
(and the 2D dwgs created). When highlighting a 2D dwg, the upper area of the
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 347 Detail Center


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 5: Managing Moved and Renamed Files

RevisionCenter shows all the information about the DWG file. We can see for now
that there is no problem.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Now we will relocate the 2D dwgs in another folder and come back to check this
same dialog box. Close the RevisionCenter and the DetailCenter. For this exercise,
create a new folder on C: and name it “My Projects”. Use Windows Explorer and
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

move the two dwgs files TRNDET1 and TRNDET2 to the new My Projects folder.

Detail Center 348 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 5: Managing Moved and Renamed Files

Then open the DetailCenter and RevisionCenter again and check the same
window as above.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Notice the ? (question mark) in front of the dwg files and the "File not found" text
in the File state data field. We must tell the RevisionCenter where the file is
located now by right-clicking on the dwg file to update and selecting "Change file
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

path".

Feb-12 349 Detail Center


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 5: Managing Moved and Renamed Files

Browse to the new location of the corresponding dwg file and select it. The
RevisionCenter is now updated.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Repeat this process for TRNDET2.dwg.


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Detail Center 350 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Detail Styles
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Module Overview
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The DetailStyles program offers you some decisive influence over the style of the
detailing because it is here that you determine what is to be dimensioned, how to
dimension it, what texts to include, whether to attach position flags, and much
more.

A great number of parameters are available to specify the appearance of your


drawing. You can save and load these styles individually and even import or
export them from other users. Since it is possible to manage entire parameter
Student: Mariano Tomasino

records you can create specific styles for specific detailing tasks (e.g. for
overviews, workshop plans, life-sized displays, etc.) and just select them later.

Your main task consists of defining the suitable styles once. The program offers
the option to immediately check each change using a preview feature (see
DetailCenter Preview) - until details look exactly like you want them to be for your
requirements.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Saving Styles
Normally, the DetailStyles are saved together with the 3D-model of the drawing.
This means that you always have to save your model if the modifications of
DetailStyles are to be kept permanently.

You can write a DetailStyle as a file on the hard drive and re-import it into other
models. You can also replace only partial sections of a style. This permits you to
exchange, update or transfer the DetailStyles of different models. Furthermore,
you can create a collection of DetailStyles and use only those styles suitable for
your particular modelling requirements.

Feb-12 351 Detail Styles

Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated


Module Overview

Partial Loading of Style Parameters


If, for example, you want to combine the default settings for dimensioning and
the default settings for labelling of two existing styles to create a new style, you
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

can do this by partial loading of pages.

Select the desired page in the selection tree and then call the context menu by
pressing the right mouse button. Now you can replace the parameters of the
currently selected page by the equivalent parameters of an existing style file.

Alternatively, you can also load all the pages subordinate to this page to replace a
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

much bigger set of parameters.


Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Detail Styles 352 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Module Prerequisites

Module Prerequisites
This course is designed for the experienced user of ProSteel who understands and
is capable of modeling, grouping, Part and family, positioning and using
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

DetailCenter with ProSteel. As such the participant should have a clear


understanding of the usage of MicroStation and the windows operating system.

Module Objectives
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

• Create Anchor plan style setting


• Create Shape single detail style setting
• Create Beam group detail style setting
• Create Elevation detail style setting
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Lesson 1: Creating a Detail Style


In this Section you will learn how to create a Detail style.

In creating a Detail style there are things that you need to consider. The tips below
might help you create your own style more easily.
• Start from the end result. You should have an idea of what you are aiming at
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

to have as a result. The desired end result determines the settings of your
detail styles. Set A Goal!

• Always copy the Standard Detail Style that comes with the default install of
ProSteel, and then enter your new style name. Having a reference detail style
will always help you to be on the right track.

Feb-12 353 Detail Styles


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Detail Styles
Lesson 1: Creating a Detail Style

354
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
Lesson 1: Creating a Detail Style

• Work on each page one step at a time. DO NOT EXPAND EVERYTHING. Make
your view plain and simple so that you won't get confused on what to do first.
Work on each page one step at a time and close it once you are finished.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino

• General or Common Settings - Start with your General or Common settings,


since they are applicable for all type of elements. Work on the Common
details first before working on the specific ones.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

• Application or Purpose of Detail style - Each style should have its own purpose
or application. In ProSteel you need to keep in mind, which element are you

Feb-12 355 Detail Styles


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Lesson 1: Creating a Detail Style

creating this detail style for? Will this be for a Single Part, Group, Assembly or
View? This will help you analyse and eliminate the options that you need to
set if you know the purpose of the detail style.
Focus on your purpose.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

• The most complex page in the Detail style is the Dimensions page. To make it
simpler, work on the Default Settings, 2D Display, and Description pages
Student: Mariano Tomasino

before working on the Dimensions page and options.


DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Detail Styles 356 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Example 1: Anchor Plan

Example 1: Anchor Plan


From the Standard Detail Style, make a copy and save it as Anchor Plan Detail
Style.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

From the Parts tab of the 2D Detail Center, select the Anchor Plan view and then
drag and drop it to the Anchor Plan Detail Style.

Set the parameters as shown below.


Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 357 Detail Styles


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Detail Styles
Example 1: Anchor Plan

358
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

359 Feb-12
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Detail Styles
Example 1: Anchor Plan
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Detail Styles
Example 1: Anchor Plan

360
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

361 Feb-12
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Detail Styles
Example 1: Anchor Plan
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Detail Styles
Example 1: Anchor Plan

362
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

363 Feb-12
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Detail Styles
Example 1: Anchor Plan
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Detail Styles
Example 1: Anchor Plan

364
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
Example 2: Single Part DetailStyle

Example 2: Single Part DetailStyle


From the Standard Detail Style, make a copy and save it as Bentley-Rectangular
Plate.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Open the dialog for Display and Structure to modify the display and filter. Change
these settings for both the Parts tab and Views tab.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

From the Parts tab of the 2D Detail Center, select one baseplate and then drag
and drop it to Bentley-Rectangular Plate. Set the parameters as shown below.

Feb-12 365 Detail Styles


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Detail Styles
Example 2: Single Part DetailStyle

366
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

367 Feb-12
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Detail Styles
Example 2: Single Part DetailStyle
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Detail Styles
Example 2: Single Part DetailStyle

368
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

369 Feb-12
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Detail Styles
Example 2: Single Part DetailStyle
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Detail Styles
Example 2: Single Part DetailStyle

370
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
Example 3: Beam Group Detail

Example 3: Beam Group Detail


From the Standard Detail Style, make a copy and save it as Bentley-Beams 1 view
Detail Style.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Open the dialog for Display and Structure to modify the display and filter. Change
these settings for both the Parts tab and Views tab.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

From the Parts tab of the 2D Detail Center, select the beam between grids A and B
and then drag and drop it to Bentley-Beams 1 view Detail Style. Set the
parameters as shown below.

Feb-12 371 Detail Styles


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Detail Styles
Example 3: Beam Group Detail

372
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

373 Feb-12
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Detail Styles
Example 3: Beam Group Detail
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Detail Styles
Example 3: Beam Group Detail

374
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

375 Feb-12
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Detail Styles
Example 3: Beam Group Detail
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Detail Styles
Example 3: Beam Group Detail

376
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

377 Feb-12
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Detail Styles
Example 3: Beam Group Detail
Example 4: Making Elevation Detail

Example 4: Making Elevation Detail


From the Standard Detail Style, make a copy and save it as Bentley-Elevations
Detail Style.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

From the Parts tab of the 2D Detail Center, select BENTLEY_Y_1 and then drag and
drop it to Bentley-Bentley-Elevations Detail Style.

Set the parameters as shown below.


Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Detail Styles 378 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

379 Feb-12
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Example 4: Making Elevation Detail

Detail Styles
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Detail Styles
Example 4: Making Elevation Detail

380
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

381 Feb-12
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Example 4: Making Elevation Detail

Detail Styles
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Detail Styles
Example 4: Making Elevation Detail

382
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

383 Feb-12
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Example 4: Making Elevation Detail

Detail Styles
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Detail Styles
Example 4: Making Elevation Detail

384
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

385 Feb-12
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Example 4: Making Elevation Detail

Detail Styles
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Detail Styles
Example 4: Making Elevation Detail

386
Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12
Appendix - ProSteel Toolbars
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

and Tips & Tricks


Viewtools Toolbar
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

The illustration below shows the layout of the Viewtools toolbar. Below the
illustration, you will see the names of each tool. They are keyed by the letters A
through K.
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Tool Set Tools


A. ProSteel Isometric Overview 1
Overview Isometric Overview 2
Isometric Overview 3
Isometric Overview 4
Isometric Overview 5

B: Select View Select View

Feb-12 387 Appendix - ProSteel Toolbars and Tips & Tricks

Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated


Viewtools Toolbar

Tool Set Tools


C: Plane View Plane View

D: Object View Object View Centered


Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Object View at Points


Faceview Centered
Faceview at Points

E: Clip Planes Clip Planes


Clip Planes Off
Clip Planes On
Clip Planes Distance
Clip Planes Flip
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

F: Perspective Perspective
On
Distance
Focal
Off

G: Free View Free View


Student: Mariano Tomasino

H: Analysis Analysis Effective Line


Effective Line

I: Zoom Zoom
Modelspace
Paperspace
Viewport Scale
Viewport Maximum
Paperspace Maximum
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

J: Object UCS Object UCS Centered


Object UCS at Points
Face UCS Centered
Face UCS at Points

K: Display Classes Display Classes


Hide
Hide Group
Hide Except
Hide Except Group
Hide at plane
Hide at plane Except
ProSteel 3D Region
Area Classes
Part Families
Process Status

Appendix - ProSteel Toolbars and Tips & Tricks 388 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Elements Toolbar

Elements Toolbar
The illustration below shows the layout of the Elements toolbar. Below the
illustration, you will see the names of each tool. They are keyed by the letters A
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

through N.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Tool Set Tools


A: Shape Options Add Shape Section
Dispatch Blocks
Shape

B: Plates Plates
Add Flanges
Wall
Plate Funnel Easy
Plate Funnel Extended
Cover Plate

C: Bolting Bolting

D: Connection Connection Center


Center

Feb-12 389 Appendix - ProSteel Toolbars and Tips & Tricks


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Elements Toolbar

Tool Set Tools


E: EndPlate EndPlate
Endplate Normal
Endplate Splice
Endplate Flange
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

F: Baseplates Baseplates Acc.DSTV


Baseplates With Stiffener

G: Shearplates Shearplates
Shearplates Connection
Beam Beam Shearplate Connection
Box Columns Shearplate Connection
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Beam Column Flange Connection

H: Splice Splice
Connection Hollow Beam Splitter
Beam Beam Splice
Box Columns Splice
Column Splice
Pipe Splice
Angle Splice
Student: Mariano Tomasino

I: Purlin Purlin Connection


Connection Beam Beam Clamp
Purlin Beam Fly Brace

J: ProSteel 3D Stiffener
Stiffener Stiffener at Angle

K: Haunch Haunch
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

L: Columns Beam WebAngle


Connection Columns Beam Endplate
Columns Beam Web
Moment Connection
Seated Connection
Pipe Strap

Appendix - ProSteel Toolbars and Tips & Tricks 390 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Elements Toolbar

Tool Set Tools


M: Bracing Bracing Static
Bracing Dynamic
RodBracing
Gusset Plate Connection
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

N: ProSteel 3D Stairs
Structural Object Circular Stairs
Frames
Purlins
Handrails
Trusses
Ladders
Joists
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Distribute Roof\Wall Panels


Façade
Cat Walk
Podest Rectangular
Podest Cylindrical
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 391 Appendix - ProSteel Toolbars and Tips & Tricks


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Edit Toolbar

Edit Toolbar
The illustration below shows the layout of the Edit toolbar. Below the illustration,
you will see the names of each tool. They are keyed by the letters A through K.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Appendix - ProSteel Toolbars and Tips & Tricks 392 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Edit Toolbar

Tool Set Tools


A: Drill Drill
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

B: Modify 1 Modify 1
Dialog
Shorten Via Pick
Shorten Via Enter
Lengthen Via Pick
Lengthen Via Enter
Extend/Trim To Line
Extend/Trim To Line
Extend/Trim To Object
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Divide
Connect
Notch
Round Edge

C: Modify 2 Modify 2
Polycut
Cope
Angle Bisect
Chamfer Plate Edge
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Insert Plate Edge


Plate Editor

D: Primitives Box
Sphere
Cylinder
Cone
Extrude
Rotate
Hull
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Rect 2 Circle
Conical Pipe
Torus

E: Boolean Union
Subtract
Intersect
Subtract Intersect Body

Feb-12 393 Appendix - ProSteel Toolbars and Tips & Tricks


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Edit Toolbar

Tool Set Tools


F: Copy Copy
Dialog
X'
Y"
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Z"
Plane
3D
Drag
Mirror
X"
Y"
Z"
Plane
3D
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Drag
Mirror
Dispatch

G: Positioning Positioning
Dialog
Position - Element
Position - Groups
Position - Groups Part
Position - Short
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Position - Bolts
Position - Mounting
Position - Free
Compare Part
Search Parts

H: Groups Groups
Dialog
Edit Group Data
Create Group
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Dissolve Group
Add To Group
Subtract From Group
Check Group

I: Partlist and Projectmanagement


Export Create Partlist Database
Create Partlist
Insert Drawing Partlist
Group Containment list
NC - Data
ERP - Data
Analysis Interface
Import
Export
Create Partlist Part
Create User Shape
Drawing Information Table

Appendix - ProSteel Toolbars and Tips & Tricks 394 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Edit Toolbar

Tool Set Tools


J: Prosteel 3D Collision Detection
Collision Center Of Gravity
Detection Motionsimulation
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

K: Unfold Pipe Unfold Pipe


Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 395 Appendix - ProSteel Toolbars and Tips & Tricks


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Utilities Toolbar

Utilities Toolbar
The illustration below shows the layout of the Edit toolbar. Below the illustration,
you will see the names of each tool. They are keyed by the letters A through N.
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Appendix - ProSteel Toolbars and Tips & Tricks 396 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Utilities Toolbar

Tool Set Tools


A: Workframe Workframe
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

B: Dimension 1 Dimension 1
Dialog
Shape Default
Shape Pick
Endplate Default
Endplate Pick
Dim Arc
Dim Radius
Insert Dim Object
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

C: Dimension 2 Dimension 2
Single Horizontal
Single Vertical
Single Aligned To line
Single Aligned To Points
Chain Horizontal
Chain Vertical
Chain Aligned To line
Chain Aligned To Points
Student: Mariano Tomasino

Fence Horizontal
Fence Vertical
Fence Aligned To Line
Fence Aligned To Points

D: Construction Construction Line


Line Dialog
Horizontal Pick
Vertical Pick
Parallel And Offset
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Normal To
Normal To And Offset
Divide
Measure
Delete All

E: Elevation Elevation Symbols


Symbols

F: Welding Welding Symbols


Symbols

Feb-12 397 Appendix - ProSteel Toolbars and Tips & Tricks


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Utilities Toolbar

Tool Set Tools


G: Detail DetailCenter
Insert Drawing Border
Create 2D Section
Insert Automatic Cut
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

2D Cutout
Insert Cranked View
2D Shortening
Benchmark
Create Pure AutoCAD Drawing
Batch Create Pure AutoCAD Drawing
Create ACIS DWG
Batch Create ACIS DWG
Hole Display Style
Flatten Viewport
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Layering Display Page


Create AutoCAD Views
Insert Reference Points
Length Scale
Insert Manual Link
Set Anchor Point

H: BlockCenter BlockCenter
Student: Mariano Tomasino

I: ProSteel 3D ProSteel 3D Scale


Scale

J: Create Create Viewport


Viewport

K: Layer Layer
Viewport Window
Set Layer 0
Set Object Layer
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Object Layer Off


Workframe Layer Off
Workframe Layer On
Element Layer Off
Element Layer On
Addition Layer Off
Addition Layer On
Construction Layer Actual
Construction Layer Off
Construction Layer On

L: Direction Direction Vectors


Vectors X - Axis
Y - Axis
Z - Axis

Appendix - ProSteel Toolbars and Tips & Tricks 398 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Utilities Toolbar

Tool Set Tools


M: Start Gamma Start Gamma ray
ray
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

N: Change Change Language


Language
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 399 Appendix - ProSteel Toolbars and Tips & Tricks


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Tips and Tricks

Tips and Tricks


Most input fields for distances can accept a right-click to bring up a context menu
allowing the selection of multiple choices:
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

• 1st Insert Picked Length. This allows you to pick a distance in the drawing area
(by two points)
• 2nd Insert Picked Length. This is the same as above except the "Z" distances
will be ignored.
• Insert Calculated Value. This option will bring up a calculator which's result
will be pasted in.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería

Here listed are a few more shortcuts that can be used with various commands:
• Use the [SHIFT]+[ESC] keys to start the filter during object selection.
• Use the [ALT] key while grip editing to be able to move out of Ortho mode.
• Use the context menu {RIGHT-CLICK} to turn tool-tips (object onscreen
information) ON/OFF
Student: Mariano Tomasino

• Use the [ALT] key in Extend/Trim to line command to be able to extend to line.
• Use the context menu {RIGHT-CLICK} to turn subpart grips (little triangles on
2D drawings for subparts) ON/OFF
• Use [ESC] key while using the Purlin command for connections & cope tab.
• Use the [ALT] key in Connect command to avoid shape checking and transform
second shape as first shape.
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

• The DisplayClasses & AreaClasses dialog boxes can be lengthen by the user. If
you wish to revert back to the original length for these dialog boxes, simply
use the [CTRL] key while bringing up the dialog box.
• In the WorkFrame & Purlin command, while entering unequal grid lengths,
using the [ALT] key will let you enter the values in a linear mode. To delete the
list of unequal spacing, uncheck the equal distance entry checkbox in the
dialog, "click" in the value list dropdown while pressing the [CTRL] key.
• When using the ObjectView (six directional arrow selection), if the view is not
aligned to the World, you can press twice the [ENTER] key. You can always
force it by pressing the [ALT] key while selecting the point (before selecting
the direction).
• When snapping to a shape using the ProSteel 3D Shapepoints, pressing the
[ALT] key will let you use the reference points of the shape (if created) instead
of the centerline end-points and mid-point.

Appendix - ProSteel Toolbars and Tips & Tricks 400 Feb-12


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Tips and Tricks

• To toggle the grouping selection mode "On/Off", use [CTRL]+[SHIFT]+[A] or


[CTRL]+[H]. Keep in mind the grouping selection mode must be activated
through the grouping dialog for this to take effect.
• To cycle through object selection for overlapping objects use the [CTRL] key
Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

when selecting overlaying lines. This has changed in AutoCAD 2007-8 to


[SHIFT]+[SPACE BAR].
• In PaperSpace to cycle from one viewport to the next, use [CTRL]+[R].
• Make sure AutoCAD has its Single Document Interface (SDI) variable set to 0
(zero) in order to work with ProSteel.
Company: Seibo Ingeniería
Student: Mariano Tomasino
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted

Feb-12 401 Appendix - ProSteel Toolbars and Tips & Tricks


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
DO NOT DISTRIBUTE - Printing for Student Use is Permitted Student: Mariano Tomasino Company: Seibo Ingeniería Class Date: 27-Mar-2012

Tips and Tricks

402 Appendix - ProSteel Toolbars and Tips & Tricks


Copyright © 2011 Bentley Systems, Incorporated
Feb-12

You might also like